Schneider Electric Integrated Man-Machine Dialog PL7 MMI 37, 5.2 User Guide

Introduction and installation
Using PL7-MMI 37 software
Access
to PL7-MMI 37 software
___________________________________________________________________________
PL7-MMI 37
Integrated
compact
monitor
Volume 1
Creating an application
A
___________________________________________________________________________
Creating and tranferring the cartridge image
B
___________________________________________________________________________
Control / Utilities
C
___________________________________________________________________________
EVENT AND INTERVAL
TIMER task
D
ALARM SUPERVISOR
E
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
MATH AND LOGIC task
F
___________________________________________________________________________
Example of an application
G
___________________________________________________________________________
Appendices
Important
An operator dialog application, developed using PL7-MMI37 will only operate on
TSX or PMX model 40 processors, with the software version ≥ 4.3 (see label on
the processor)
Installation of PL7-MMI 37 on an FTX 507 requires the OS/2 1.1 TE operating
system, version ≥1.2 .
H
Contextual on-line HELP
A
___________________________________________________________________________
PL7-MMI 37
Integrated
compact
monitor
Volume 2
DIAG Application diagnostics
B
___________________________________________________________________________
ADJUST Series 7 adjustment station
C
___________________________________________________________________________
PMS-MMX Process control screens
D
___________________________________________________________________________
E
___________________________________________________________________________
F
___________________________________________________________________________
G
___________________________________________________________________________
H
___________________________________________________________________________
Important
An operator dialog application, developed using PL7-MMI37 will only operate on
TSX or PMX model 40 processors, with software version ≥ 4.3 (see label on the
processor)
Installation of PL7-MMI 37 on an FTX 507 requires the OS/2 1.1 TE operating
system, version ≥1.2 .
Preface
___________________________________________________________________________
Developments
to PCX7
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
For versions V3.3 and later, MONITOR 37 applications running on a PC or a CCX
operator panel can communicate with PCX7 PLCs (ISA format PLC card).
Special features of these PLCs are :
• use of the MMIPX OFB instead of the MMI OFB,
• the TENFT task is never active,
• the M37 RT1 product should be version V3.3 or later,
• the remote STOP command is not available,
• the "Directory" function is not available.
___________________________________________________________________________
P/1
___________________________________________________________________________
Developments to PL7-MMI 37, version 52 compared to version 5
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This version of PL7-MMI 37 is in line with the widening of the "Man-Machine Interface"
range for use on CCX 57 or 77 type terminals or PC compatible microcomputers.
The main developments to the TXT L PL7 M37 V52E software compared to the
TXT L PL7 M37 V5E software are as follows :
MMI OFB
2 OFBs are now supplied with the PL7 MMI37 product :
MMI OFB
implementing communication with all series 7 PLCs
Except PCX
MMIPX OFB
which must be used instead of the MMI OFB when the PLC is a PCX
ISA card
These two OFBs are not compatible with the previous version of PL7-MMI 37 (V2.5).
This means that the MMI OFB and the operator dialog application must be the same
version : ≥ V52.
Main screen
• Enables a CCX or PC compatible microcomputer to be selected as the target
machine.
• Enables the address of the UNI-TELWAY, FIPIO, FIPWAY or ETHWAY network to
which the CCX or the PC is connected to be specified.
Creating tables / Transferring the application
• The "create tables", "select tasks" and "transfer" sequences have been automated.
GED (Graphics editor)
• Creating 640 x 480 screens (CCX target).
ANT (Animation editor)
• The ability to display text field reference facilitates screen creation.
• The ability to import, export and delete symbols.
• The ability to center message box messages.
Save
• The application can be saved on the hard disk.
Alarms
• The alarms from the SDBASE symbols can be configured automatically.
Operation
• The alarm screens display new action zones.
• Graphic screen printing controlled by PLC variable is available for CCX 57 or 77
machines or PC compatible microcomputers.
___________________________________________________________________________
P/2
Preface
___________________________________________________________________________
Using a V5 application with TXT L PL7 M37 V52 software
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This requires the V2.5 or V2.6 operator dialog application to be converted to a V3.0
application, and the MMI OFB configuration to be modified in PL7-3.
To do this :
If you want to keep the original target machine (TSX PCM 27 or 37)
• Configure the new MMI OFB V3.0 in the XTEL / PL7-3 application.
• Recreate the tables (Generate menu, Create tables command, Complete
Regeneration). Once the tables have been created, reply "No" to the displayed
message : "Attention the MMI.BIN file has changed. Do you want to use the
TRANSFER tool?".
• Select all the tasks and transfer.
If you want to transfer your application to a CCX or PC
• Configure the new MMI OFB V3.0 in the XTEL application.
• In the "select application" menu, modify the type of target machine, enter the station
network address and choose the screen definition (640 x 350).
• Select all the tasks and transfer.
• Ensure that the target machine has the appropriate driver and the acceptance
software for the MMI application (TSX LF M37 RT1 V52).
• Recreate the tables (Generate menu, Create tables command, Complete
Regeneration). Once the tables have been created, reply "No" to the displayed
message : "Attention the MMI.BIN file has changed. Do you want to use the
TRANSFER tool?".
• Select all the tasks and transfer.
___________________________________________________________________________
P/3
___________________________________________________________________________
Developments
to PL7-MMI 37, version 2.5 compared to previous version
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This version of PL7-MMI 37 is compatible with V4 and V5 processors. The MMI OFB
configured in the CPU is the same whatever the type of processor.
The main developments to the TXT L PL7 M37 V5E software compared to the
TXT L PL7 M37 V4•E are as follows :
MMI OFB
The MMI OFB has changed and it is not compatible with the previous version of
PL7-MMI 37 (V2.0). The significance of this is that the MMI OFB and the operator dialog
application must be the same version : ≥ V2.5.
XTEL-SDBASE interface
A priori, any new mnemonic symbol entered is considered a part of the XTEL-SDBASE
database in which it is sought. The dialog box for defining the type of symbol is therefore
only displayed if the new symbol is not found in the XTEL-SDBASE database.
GED (Graphics editor)
• The cursor coordinates are displayed in the menu zone, using the same scale as in
ANT.
• A new character font (halo 104) is available.
ANT (Animation editor)
• A double click on an animated object immediately displays the animation parameters.
• 2 search modes are offered : search by mnemonic symbol (Container 1, etc) or by
object name (barxxxx, pntxxxx, etc).
• The parameters selected in the animation entry boxes (colors, direction of bargraphs,
character size, etc) are memorized from one animation to another, so as to make it
easier to enter several similar animations.
Screen saver
It is possible to configure the automatic screen blackout, provided that the application
is loaded onto a TSX PCM module, which is version ≥ 1.4.
Communication with the PLC
• The communication table has a new format. If an existing application is used with
TXT L PL7 M37 V5 software in a V5 station, it is converted to the new format and can
no longer be used with a previous version :
V4 Station
V5 Station
PL7-MMI 37 V4
YES
NO
NO
▼
▼
PL7-MMI 37 V5
NO
YES
YES
▲
X-TEL V5
▼
X-TEL V4
V4 Station
• A variable can be defined a posteriori in the communication table, which authorizes the entry
of a new symbol.
• The COMMUNICATION task offers an Import function, in order to import variables into the
communication table and enable "modular" programming under the CM.
• The COMMUNICATION task supports double word type variables in floating point format.
___________________________________________________________________________
P/4
Preface
___________________________________________________________________________
Using
a V2.0 application with TXT L PL7 M37 V5 software
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This requires the V2.0 operator dialog application to be converted to a V2.5 application,
and the MMI OFB configuration to be modified in PL7-3. It is assumed that the PL7-3
application has already been updated (refer to the PL7-3 V5 operating modes or the
software workshop documentation). To do this :
The V2.0 operator dialog application should first be saved onto diskettes using
the TSX/PMX V4 station (Utilities menu, Save command).
1 Start the PL7-MMI 37 function from the mmi icon at the log-on station :
• Select the module (PCM1, PCM2, etc).
• Restore the operator dialog application previously saved on diskettes (Utilities
menu, Restore command).
• Create the tables (Generate menu, Create tables command). Once the tables
have been created, reply "No" to the displayed message : "Attention the MMI.BIN
file has changed. Do you want to use the TRANSFER tool?".
• Quit the PL7-MMI 37 function.
2 Start the XTEL-CONF tool :
• Verify the logic spaces (Generate menu, With entry of application parameters
command).
• Quit the XTEL-CONF tool.
3 Start the PL7-3 function, which performs an automatic reading of the PL7-3 binary
file (PL3_3.BIN) :
• Link the application program with the new configuration defined under XTEL-CONF
([V5CONF] command).
• Activate the Configuration mode and configure the new MMI OFB : version 2.5
(refer to section 4.7-4 in divider A).
• Validate the new configuration ([VALID] command, then [YES]).
• Start reconfiguration of the PL7-3 application (RECONFIGURATION heading).
• Save the PL7-3 application ([STORE] command).
• Quit the PL7-3 function.
4 Start the TRANSFER tool and do a global transfer to the PLC (Transfer menu,
Disk → PLC Station / Global Transfer command) :
• Quit the TRANSFER tool.
5 Restart the PL7-MMI 37 function, which will transfer the new operator dialog
application to the TSX PCM module :
• Select the tasks to be transferred (Generate menu, Select tasks command).
• Transfer the application to the module (Transfer menu).
• Quit the PL7-MMI 37 function.
Notes
• If any options are used (DIAG, ADJUST, etc), they must be reconfigured under CM.
• Before reconfiguring the VISUDYN option, the cross-references must be regenerated under
PL7-3.
• Certain tasks may need resizing in the Task Manager.
___________________________________________________________________________
P/5
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
P/6
______________________________________________________
Contents
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
Introduction and installation
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
General
Configuration required for PL7-MMI 37
Verifying the hardware
Connections
Installing the software
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
Using PL7-MMI 37 software
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
2/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.1
Method for creating an operator dialog application
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3
Access to PL7-MMI 37 software
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
3/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
3.1
3.2
Selecting the communication module
Main screen
___________________________________________________________________________
1
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
2
______________________________________________________
Introduction and installation
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
General
1/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1-1 Functions provided by PL7-MMI 37 software
1/2
_______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Configuration required for PL7-MMI 37
1/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.3
Checking the hardware
1/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.4
Connections
1/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.5
Installing the software
1/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.5-1 Preliminary operations
1/4
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.5-2 Installation procedure
1/5
_______________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/6
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 General
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This document describes the installation and use of the PL7-MMI 37 operator dialog
application design software, ref. no. TXT PL7 M37 V52E, on a terminal with an OS/2
operating system and X-TEL or MINI X-TEL Software Workshop :
• FTX 507 terminal
• IBM PS/2 micro-computer or PC Compatible.
This design office software is used for designing an operator dialog application for
downloading to and executing on a TSX PCM 27 or TSX PCM 37 communication
module, or an IBM PC compatible microcomputer.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1-1 Functions provided by PL7-MMI 37 software
This software provides the following services :
• Creating screen backgrounds (static images)
• Defining animation on the screen backgrounds
• Testing the animated screens
• Saving and retrieving animated symbols
• Creating configuration tables
• Creating the cartridge image
• Transferring the application to the local cartridge or to the module cartridge
• Documentation
• Displaying the status of the communication module, or the IBM PC compatible
microcomputer.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
1
Introduction and installation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2 Configuration required for PL7-MMI 37
__________________________________________________________________________________________
To run PL7-MM 37 software, an FTX 417 or FTX 507 terminal or an IBM PS/2
microcomputer or PC compatible must be used. It should be equipped as follows :
• OS/2 operating system (minimum OS/2, version 1.2, 1.3 or 2.1)
• X-TEL Software Workshop : TXT L BASE V5E or MINI X-TEL : TXT L BJR V5E
• A mouse
This means that a minimum of 4 Mb RAM memory (6 Mb is recommended) and a 40 Mb
hard disk must be used (refer to the hardware configuration required for XTEL
operation).
Important
An operator dialog operation, developed using PL7-MMI 37, will only operate on
TSX or PMX model 40 processor with software version ≥ 4.3 (see label on the
processor).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.3
Checking the hardware
____________________________________________________________________________________________
The TXT L PL7 M37 V52E software package consists of :
• A set of 3 1/2" PL7-MMI 37 software diskettes
• A 3 1/2" MMI 37 function block diskette
• A protection key
• A licence agreement
• This manual, ref. no. TXT DM M37 V52E.
Transferring the operator dialogue application to the TSX PCM 27 or TSX PCM 37
communication module requires :
• If it is a local transfer, at least a 256 Kb cartridge (ref. no.TSX R.M 128 16) and a
cartridge programmer, ref. no. TSX TPE 020 1.
• If the transfer is via the PLC processor, the terminal/PLC connection kit :
- T FTX CB 7 5 (FTX 507) data cable or
- TSX TAC 03 (IBM PS/2 or PC compatible) connection kit.
(Refer to X-TEL BASE or MINI X-TEL BASE documentation for connecting the
various elements).
• If transfer is via MAPWAY, ETHWAY, FIPWAY or FIPIO, refer to the relevant
documentation.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.4 Connections
__________________________________________________________________________________________
It is assumed that all terminal-specific connections (monitor, keyboard, mouse, printer,
key holder, etc.) have been made. Therefore this section only describes the installation
of the software key.
This is done by placing the software key in the empty slot in the key holder.
Note
This software key contains the access right for accessing PL7-MMI 37 software. The Key Manager
tool, supplied with X-TEL BASE, is used to transfer this right to the master key in order to load the
rights to a single key (the master key) and to free a slot in the key holder.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.5
Installing the software
____________________________________________________________________________________________
1.5-1 Preliminary operations
The following actions are recommended before installing PL7-MMI 37 on a hard disk :
• Read the licence agreement and warranty relating to restrictions on copying and
installing the software.
• Make a copy of the diskettes required for installation in order to protect them from
accidental damage and only work with the copy.
Important
The 3 1/2" diskettes are supplied in the write-protected position. Do not alter the
position of the write-protect tab on these diskettes.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Introduction and installation
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.5-2 Installation procedure
The following operations must precede installation of PL7-MMI 37 software :
1. Check that X-TEL V5 or MINI X-TEL V5 Workshop Software is already installed (see
relevant documentation).
If this is the case, proceed with the installation of PL7-MMI 37 software. If not, install
the Software Workshop first (refer to the relevant documentation).
2. Close the current session (see relevant documentation).
Installing PL7-MMI 37 software
• Open a full screen OS/2 session.
• Insert the first "PL7-MMI 37 Software" diskette in the drive.
• Enter the drive identifier (a: or b:) and then confirm with <Enter>.
• Starting at the new prompt, e.g. [A:\] or [B:\], type install and press <Enter>.
• Follow the procedure given on the screen to install all the "PL7-MMI 37 Software"
diskettes.
• Insert the "MMI 37 function block" in the drive.
• Type install and press <Enter>.
• When an additional diskette called "UPDATE" is supplied with your product version,
insert it in the drive and type install.
• When installation is complete and if it is the last one, check the configuration. Confirm
with <Enter>.
• Remove the diskette from the drive and return to X-TEL by pressing <Ctrl><Esc>.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/6
______________________________________________________
Using PL7-MMI 37 software
Section 2
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.1
Method for creating an operator dialog application
2/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
2/10
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1 Method for creating an operator dialog application
__________________________________________________________________________________________
The method shown here is intended to guide the user through the process of designing
an operator dialog application for execution on a TSX PCM 27 or TSX PCM 37
communication module, a CCX, or an IBM or compatible PC. For this, a number of
operations must be performed in chronological order, at station and tool levels, and then
for the PL7-3 function and finally for the PL7-MMI 37.
1. Define the mmi function in the station
• Pull down the Define menu in the Functions window
and select the item New.
• Select the mmi function in the dialog box. The mmi
icon is then displayed in the Functions window.
2. Define the application structure and configure the
TSX PCM module(s), or the CCXs if the PLC/CCX
connection is FIPIO.
• Start the conf station tool.
• Pull down the Define menu and select Config. I/O
rack for the PCMs, or Remote I/O config. for the
CCXs or FTXs on FIPIO.
Refer to divider D in the
document X-TEL or MINI
X-TEL Software Workshops,
basic tools
(TXT DM TLS V5E).
• Select the 0/1 rack and define its configuration
(processor, module(s), etc). Do the same for the
other racks. The TSX PCM module(s) will be
configured at the chosen positions.
• Generate the application structure. To do this, pull
down the Generate menu and select the item with
entry of application parameters. Organize the
application memory (size of dedicated zones,
optimization, etc).
• Quit the conf station tool.
3. Enter the symbols common to PL7-3 and PL7-MMI 37
into the sdbase database
• Start the sdbase station tool.
• Edit the sdbase symbol database using the sdbase
item in the Edit menu.
Refer to divider D in the
document X-TEL or MINI
X-TEL Software Workshops,
basic tools
(TXT DM TLS V5E).
• Select the PCMx usage criteria (with x = the number
of the operator dialogue module). For Symbols which
will be used for diagnostic purposes, also define the
DIAGPCM criteria.
• Enter the symbols (variable, mnemonic symbol,
comment and any possible extended comment).
• Quit the sdbase station tool.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Using PL7-MMI 37 software
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4. Configure the operator dialog in PL7-3
• Start the pl7_3 function.
• Configure the MMI OFB or MMIPX OFB if the PLC is
a PCX7.
Refer to the document
PL7-3 Languages V5
Operating Modes (TXT DM
PL7 3 V5E).
• Confirm the new configuration.
• Reconfigure the PL7-3 application.
• Save the new PL7-3 binary file.
5. Start PL7-MMI 37
6. Select the type of machine receiving the application
• When using a TSX PCM 27 or TSX PCM 37 module,
select the module number and/or enter its physical
address in the PLC.
Double click on the mmi
icon.
See section 3 in this
document - Access to
PL7-MMI 37 software
(TXT DM PL7 M37 V52E)
• When using a CCX with a PCX card, select the CCX
with PCX7 type.
• When using a CCX, define the network address
where the machine is connected.
• Select the resolution of the screen used.
• When using a TSX PCM 27 or TSX PCM 37 module,
define if several operator stations are linked.
• When using a TSX PCM 27 or 37, select the required
language.
• Activate or deactivate the screen saver.
See section 2.4 in divider C,
in this document.
7. Add any other options
• Pull down the Utilities menu and select Add options.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
8. Create the static screen backgrounds
Refer to section 2 in
divider A, in this document.
• Start GED graphic editor. To do this, pull down the
Create menu and select GED Graphic Editor.
• Define the background color of the first screen.
Section 2.4 in divider A,
CHNG BG icon.
• Draw a grid (optional) to simplify positioning the various
graphic objects (keys, text, etc). If the grid is visible on
the screen, select a color not used in the drawing.
Section 2.8 in divider A.
• Draw the graphic objects (control buttons, etc).
Sections 2.7, 2.12, 2.13,
2.14, 2.16 and 2.17 in
divider A.
• Color the graphic objects.
Section 2.11 in divider A.
• Enter and position the text.
Section 2.9 in divider A.
• When a graphic object is to be used several times in
the screen or in another screen, it is advisable to draw
it first and then allocate it a symbol. Other drawings
can then be created by calling up the symbol.
• To remove the grid, change its color to that of the
background.
• Save the first screen under the MENU file name,
compulsory for all applications.
Section 2.10 in divider A.
Section 2.13 in divider A,
ERA. BG icon.
Section 2.6 in divider A.
• Clear the screen.
• Repeat the previous drawing operations until all the
screens for the application have been created. They
should be saved under different names.
Section 2.4 in divider A,
CLR SCRN icon.
• Quit the graphic editor.
Section 2.5 in divider A.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/4
2
Using PL7-MMI 37 software
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9. Animate the screen backgrounds
• Start the animation editor ANT. To do this, pull down
the Create menu and select ANT Animation editor.
Refer to section 3 in
divider A and section 4 in
divider H, of this document.
• Open the file to be animated.
Refer to section 3.3 in
divider A.
• Select the first object to be animated. It appears
inside 4 selection points.
Click on the graphic object
to be animated.
• Pull down the Animate menu, then select the type of
animation :
- paint for an object which changes color (lamp),
- bargraph for a measurement which changes
(temperature, level, etc),
- text output for a text display zone,
- numeric output for a values display zone,
- text input for an entry zone,
- function key for a control button,
- message box for a display zone for several
messages.
Section 3.5 in divider A.
• Define the animation parameters (variables,
limits, colors, etc).
Sections 3.6 to 3.12 in
divider A.
• If the variable is not yet defined in sdbase, select its
type in the dialog box displayed : PL7, binary, analog,
etc. If the PL7 type is selected, it starts the sdbase
editor to enable data to be entered : usage criteria,
variable, mnemonic symbol, etc.
Section 3.13 in divider A.
• Assign the variable as read only, write only or
read/write. If it is assigned as read only, define the
read period : 0.5 s to 30 s.
Section 3.13 in divider A.
• Repeat this animation procedure for all the other
objects to be animated on the screen.
Section 3.14 in divider A.
• Test the animations, to check that they are correct
(colors, position of displays and entry boxes, etc).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
• Save the animated screen using the Save item
in the File menu.
• Quit the animation editor.
10. If required, configure the non graphic functions
(alarms, math and logic, etc)
Section 3.16 in divider A.
Refer to section 4 in
divider A, of this document.
• Start the Configuration Manager CM. To do this,
pull down the Create menu and select
Configuration Manager CM.
• Open the configuration table to be defined :
- interval timers to define events which occur
periodically at regular intervals,
Section 1.2 in divider D.
- event timers to define events which occur at fixed
dates and times,
Section 1.3 in divider D.
- communication to modify, if required, the transfer
direction of a variable exchanged between the
module and the PLC processor (write, read or
read/write). If the variable is read, this table is
also used to modify its read period (0.5 s to 30 s),
Section 4.7 in divider A.
- controlling alarms to modify, if required, the
attributes of the alarms screen (background
color, alarm band variable and acknowledgment
variable) and to define the default status of the
selections which can be accessed via the function
keys on the list of alarms screen,
Section 1.2 in divider E.
- groups of alarms to define the various displays
of groups of alarms (initial colors, colors after
acknowledgment, etc),
Section 1.3 in divider E.
- alarm definition to define the conditions and
the priority of the alarms,
Section 1.4 in divider E.
- alarm screen control to modify, if required, the
function keys on the alarm screen,
Section 1.5 in divider E.
- display alarms to retrieve, if required, data from the
alarms screen into a graphic screen,
Section 1.6 in divider E.
- system configuration to modify, if required, the
options associated with each task,
Section 4.8 in divider A.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/6
2
Using PL7-MMI 37 software
_______________________________________________________________________________________
- math and logic triggers to define the math and
logic task triggers,
Section 1.3 in divider F.
- math and logic variables to define the math and
logic task variables,
Section 1.2 in divider F.
- math and logic procedures to define the math
and logic procedures, etc.
Section 1.4 in divider F.
• Enter the various parameters for the table. Use the
<Tab> and <Shift><Tab> keys to move the cursor
around all the fields.
• Confirm the contents of the table.
• If the variable is not yet defined in sdbase, select its
type in the dialog box displayed : PL7, binary,analog
etc. If the PL7 type is selected, it starts the sdbase
editor to enable data to be entered : usage criteria,
varaible, mnemonic symbol, etc.
Section 3.13 in divider A.
• Assign the variable as read only, write only or
read/write. If it is assigned as read only, define the
read period : 0.5 s to 30 s.
Section 3.13 in divider A, of
this document.
• Repeat this procedure, in order to select the type of
all the variables in the table.
• Exit the configuration table.
• Repeat these operations to define all the other
configuration tables.
• Quit Configuration Manager.
Section 4.5 in divider A.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/7
_______________________________________________________________________________________
11. Transfer the PL7-3 to the PLC
• Start the transfer station tool.
• Pull down the Transfer menu and select
Disk -> PLC Station .../Partial Transfer or
Global Transfer.
Refer to divider D in the
document X-TEL or MINI
X-TEL Software Workshop,
basic tools
(TXT DM TLS V5E).
• Select PL7 3-APPLI and press theTransfer key.
• When the transfer is complete, quit the transfer
station tool.
12. Select the tasks to be transferred to the target machine
Section 1.4 in divider B.
• Pull down the Generate menu and select Select
Tasks.
• Select the tasks to be transferred to the module or the
CCX then confirm.
13. Transfer the files defined in the list to the
target machine
Section 2 in divider B.
• Ensure that the target machine is operational.
• On the first transfer, format the cartridge into
which the files are to be transferred when using a
TSX PCM.
Section 1.1 in divider C.
• Pull down the Transfer menu and select
Upload/download.
• Enter the password to authorize the transfer.
• Select the transfer direction : application to target
machine, then start the transfer (with table creation)
by pressing OK.
14. Start the MMI application running
Section 2.3 in divider B.
Section 1 in divider C, of
this document.
• Pull down the Control menu on the PL7-MMI 37 main
screen and select Control.
• Enter the password to authorize running of the
application.
• Select the Run command. After Confirmation, this
command starts the application running.
• Quit the control function.
Note : it is also possible to use the operator terminal to start the
application running.
15. Test and debug the application
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/8
Using PL7-MMI 37 software
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
16. Document the application, if required
Section 2.6 in divider C.
• Pull down the Utilities menu and select Documentation.
• Pull down the Create menu and select Title Page.
• Enter the file cover page, the confirm.
• Pull down the Create menu and select Footer.
• Customize the footer which will be printed on every
page of the file, then confirm.
• Pull down the Create menu and select Sections.
• Define the contents of the file and the printing format,
then confirm them.
• Pull down the Print menu and select a printing type :
local printing or send to the station, to print the file
using the XTEL-DOC tool.
• Define the contents of the file to be printed, then
confirm.
• Quit the documentation function.
17. Save the application to diskettes
Section 2.5 in divider C.
Note : it is advisable to perform regular saves of the application
during the design and debugging stages.
18. Quit PL7-MMI 37
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/9
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/10
______________________________________________________
Access to PL7-MMI 37 software
Section 3
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.1
Selecting the communication module
3/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.2
Main screen
3/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
3/6
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.1 Selecting the target machine
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This is achieved via a dialog box which appears automatically as soon as the MMI icon
is activated. It is used to define the general characteristics of the target machine.
Appli1 to Appli_4 field
This used to select and configure an application. This application then
becomes the current application which will be used on the target
machine.
Type
This is used to define the target machine. Two types of configuration
are available :
- The operator dialog is supported by a screen and a keyboard
connected to a TSX PCM 27 or 37 module of the PLC
- The operator dialog is carried out via a CCX57, CCX77 or an IBM or
compatible PC.
Country
This is used to define the type of keyboard used by the PCM. If the
target machine is a CCX or a PC, the language is configured in the
machine "boot" files.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Access to PL7-MMI 37 software
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Define screen
This is used to display the resolution of the screen used on the target
machine :
• 320x200 pixels (only for TSX PCM 27 or 37 modules)
• 640x350 pixels
• 640x480 pixels (only for CCX or PC).
(*) Maximum authorized number of machines per configuration.
TSX/PMX 47-40
TSX/PMX 67-40
V4 Processors
1
1
2
4
V5 Processors
1
2
2
4
Date
TSX/PMX 87-40 TSX/PMX 107-40
Indicates the date any tables were last created, using the Create
tables item on the PL7-MMI 37 Generate pulldown menu.
Application description
A comment on the application is entered in the box (up to 80
characters)
Screen saver
This option is valid for a CCX, PC or TSX PCM module ≥ version
1.4.
Active enables configuration of the automatic screen blackout during
a long period of inactivity : ie when the keyboard has not been used,
the screen has not been changed or there is no new task in the
foreground. All these actions switch the screen on again if it is blacked
out. If the screen is switched on by an action other than on the
keyboard, the automatic blackout is disabled and only becomes
active again after the next keyboard action.
Time in minutes defines the period of inactivity (in minutes) before
the automatic screen blackout : 1≤ time≤ 99.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
When using a PCM27/37 module
The user must fill in the following characteristics :
Rack and module numbers are used to enter the physical address
of the communication module in the PLC :
• Rack 0, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14
• Module, between 0 and 7.
Multi console is used to define whether several operator consoles
are daisychained to the communication module.
If this is the case, the corresponding box is ticked. The keyboard
language is forced to US English.
When using a CCX console or an IBM PC or compatible
The user must fill in the local address of the target machine
CCX/PC address :
• When connected via ETHWAY, indicate the address used to access
the station from the XTEL workshop. The format is NN.SS
• When using a UNI-TELWAY connection, indicate the address used
to access the station from the XTEL workshop. The format is
NN.SS.5.rm
NN.SS indicates the network address of the master station on the
UNI-TELWAY link. The default value is 0.254. The permitted field
values are 0 to 127 for NN and 0 to 63 for SS.
rm indicates the rack-module address of the master module on the
UNI-TELWAY link.
rm is between 0 to 77 in the case of a UNI-TELWAY SCM module.
rm = 255 when using an integral SCI module.
• When using a FIPIO or FIPWAY connection, indicate the address
used to access the station from the XTEL workshop. The format is
NN.SS.8.2.pr.
NN.SS indicates the network address of the FIP station master. The
default value is 0.254.The permitted field values are
0 to 127 for NN and 0 to 63 for SS.
cp (connection point) indicates the physical position of the
device on the communication channel.
• When connecting a PCX7 type PLC, enter the PLC address (NN.SS)
followed by .1 to access the CCX/PC.
OK
Confirms the parameters selected or entered and deletes the dialog
box. All functions on the main menu can then be accessed.
Cancel
Cancels the selections made and deletes the dialog box. Only the
Utilities and Exit functions on the main menu can then be accessed.
Help
Accesses the help screen for the dialog box.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Access to PL7-MMI 37 software
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.2 Main screen
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This screen is displayed after confirmation of the communication module selection. It is
used to access all functions offered by PL7-MMI 37 software, by activating items in the
pulldown menu.
Utilities
This is used to select another communication module for the station
or to select one of the following for the current module :
• Delete the application in the station
• Add previously installed options
• Save or retrieve the application
• Create an application dossier
• Check coherence with the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic symbol
database.
Create
Provides access to the editors used for designing the application :
• The GED graphics editor for drawing screens and synoptics
• The ANT animation editor for animating screens defined by GED
• CM configuration manager for defining the task parameters other
than those for the graphics task.
Generate
This is used to create the cartridge image :
• Creating tables
• Selecting tasks and files.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Transfer
This is used to transfer the cartridge image to the cartridge :
• Locally, via the cartridge programmer
• Remotely, via the terminal port of the processor or via MAPWAY.
Control
This is used to display the state of the operator dialog communication
module and to modify it if required :
• Initialize
• RUN, STOP
• Format cartridge
Exit
Exits PL7-MMI 37.
<F1>
Accesses the help screen for the main screen.
Limits
• number of addressable objects :
- bits : 4096,
- words : 2048,
- floating point numbers : 512,
- messages : 512.
• number of animations per screen : 128.
Data zone at base of screen
This zone reminds the user of the hardware configuration and the
application references. It is set out as follows :
Type of target machine
and address
Application selected
Communication driver
PLC address
Application
comment
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/6
Access to PL7-MMI 37 software
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/7
______________________________________________________
Contents part A
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
Introduction
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
1.2
Introduction
Graphics task
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
2/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.24
Introduction
Using the mouse
Description of the menu
Erasing the screen
Exiting the graphics editor
Saving or retrieving a screen
Pixel by pixel representation
Grids
Entering text
Creating symbols
Assigning color
Freehand drawing
Erasing (eraser)
Plotting lines and polygons
Rotating a symbol or a screen
Plotting circles and ellipses
Plotting rectangles
Selecting line thickness
Selecting the type of line
Creating special effects
Selecting the hatched background
Selecting colors
"UNDO" command
Converting an EGA application to a VGA application
___________________________________________________________________________
A/1
A
______________________________________________________
A
Contents part A
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3
Defining the animation
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
3/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
Introduction
Animation editor screen
File management
Modifying animations on a previously animated screen
Animating a static object
Paint type animation
Bargraph type animation
Text output type of animation
Numerical output type of animation
Text input type of animation
Function key type of animation
Message box type of animation
Defining types of variable
Testing an animation
Managing the mnemonic symbol library
Exiting the animation editor
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4
Editing configuration tables
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
4/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Configuration manager screen
4.3 Displaying elements in the real-time database
4.4 Creating reports
4.5 Exiting the Configuration manager
4.6 The database
4.7 COMMUNICATION task
4.8 Run-time manager
___________________________________________________________________________
A/2
______________________________________________________
Introduction
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Introduction
1/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Graphics task
1/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/2
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 Introduction
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Creating an operator dialog application consists of defining the tasks which are to be
executed by the TSX PCM 27 or TSX PCM 37 module or by a CCX 57 or 77 cell
controller, or by an IBM PC or compatible connected to the PLC :
• Graphics task
• Event and interval timer task
• Alarm supervisor
• Math and logic task
• PLC communication task
• On-line help, adjustment, diagnostics, optional tasks, etc.
PL7-MMI 37 software offers the following functions for these:
• A graphics editor for creating static screens (no animation) for the graphics task
• An animation editor for defining animation associated with previously created screens
• A configuration manager for defining the parameters for other tasks : event and
interval timer task, math and logic, alarm supervisor, etc.
• A database which contains the variables used in the application
• A function for creating the cartridge image
• Utilities for documenting the application, monitoring PLC status, etc.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2 Graphics task
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The graphics task represents the operational status of equipment controlled by the PLC
in a way which is easily understood by the user.
Monochrome or color synoptic screens are displayed, with the following resolutions :
• 320 x 200 pixels (when using a TSX PCM 27 or 37 module) or,
• 640 x 350 pixels or,
• 640 x 480 pixels (when using a CCX57 or 77 or an IBM PC or compatible).
Image coding is of the Bitmap type.
Note
All graphics screens must have the same resolution for a given operator dialog application.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
______________________________________________________
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
Section 2
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.1
Introduction
2/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
Using the mouse
2/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
Description of the menu
2/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.4
Erasing the screen
2/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.5
Exiting the graphics editor
2/7
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.6
Saving or retrieving a screen
2/7
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.7
Pixel by pixel representation
2/9
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.8
Grids
2/10
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.9
Entering text
2/12
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.10
Creating symbols
2/14
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.11 Assigning color
2/19
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.12 Freehand drawing
2/19
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
A
______________________________________________________
A
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
Section 2
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.13 Erasing (eraser)
2/20
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.14
Plotting lines and polygons
2/22
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.15
Rotating a symbol or a screen
2/25
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.16 Plotting circles and ellipses
2/27
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.17
Plotting rectangles
2/30
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.18 Selecting line thickness
2/33
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.19 Selecting the type of line
2/33
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.20
Creating special effects
2/34
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.21 Selecting the hatched background
2/35
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.22
Selecting colors
2/36
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.23
"UNDO" command
2/38
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.24 Converting an EGA application to a VGA application
2/39
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
2/40
___________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1 Introduction
__________________________________________________________________________________________
The graphics editor GED is used to create static screens or colored "background"
graphic images. It is accessed from the main screen via the GED item in the Create
function.
Static objects are created by using the mouse. It is possible to combine graphic (pixels),
character and symbol objects on a screen.
The basic functions required to create or modify a screen are the following : draw, erase,
plot a circle, rectangle or lines, select and assign colors, etc. Other functions include
zoom, adjust curves, rotate, special effects, copy, etc.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
Using the mouse
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The mouse moves the cursor over the whole screen. Its buttons are used to select icons
in a menu and to confirm operations.
The left button (or button 1) is used to select an icon in a menu. When it has been selected
it is highlighted to indicate that it is active.
The presence of a small square in the lower right-hand corner of an icon indicates the
existence of a sub-menu.
To display this sub-menu, the cursor is placed over the corresponding icon and the right
button on the mouse is clicked.
To choose an option from a sub-menu, the cursor should be placed on the corresponding
icon and one of the two buttons clicked.
For all icons with additional functions (indicated by a small square in the lower right-hand
corner), the icon appearing in the main menu is the program default selection, until some
other choice is made.
Icons without additional functions are selected using either button on the mouse.
In order to exit from a sub-menu without selecting an option, one of the buttons is clicked
away from the icons. The sub-menu is then no longer displayed on the screen.
In this case, the active icon in the menu is the last one selected.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/3
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.3 Description of the menu
__________________________________________________________________________________________
When the graphics editor is accessed, the menu is displayed at the top left of the screen.
The upper line of this menu consists of fourteen icons, each representing a function :
• The first three icons are used to erase the screen, to exit from the graphics editor or
to save the screens.
• The other eleven icons are the drawing functions.
The lower line of this menu comprises :
• The status zone comprising the first two icons
• The zone for selection of lines, hatched backgrounds and special effects, comprising
the next four icons
• The color selection zone comprising the last nine icons
The cursor coordinates zone displays the following, on the same scale used in ANT :
• The X and Y cursor coordinates (centre of the cross)
• The coordinates of the centre of a circle
• The coordinates of the "mobile" corner of a rectangle (the corner by which the
rectangle can be extended).
CLR
SCRN
DRAW
EXIT
ZOOM GRID
TEXT
SYMBOL
COLR
DRAW
FILL
ERASE
DRAG
Note
When restarting a screen under GED which is already animated under ANT :
. moving an object does not move the animation,
. deleting an object does not delete the animation.
In this case, animations assigned to moved or deleted objects may lead to incorrect results.
Therefore when a screen modification has been made under GED, the animations must be
re-created under ANT and tested to check that they are operating correctly.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/4
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The status zone consists of 2 squares :
1. The left-hand square displays the current drawing icon.
2. The right-hand square, divided into two, displays :
• the color of the current drawing in the upper part,
• the current hatched background in the lower part.
The central menu consists of 4 icons :
1. Line thickness icon. Six line thicknesses are offered.
2. Type of line icon, located under the ZOOM icon. Three types of line are offered (e.g.
dotted line).
3. The DRAG icon which can create special effects on the images when it is used
together with other drawing functions (e.g. copy symbol).
4. The hatched background icon, located under the TEXT icon.
The menu on the right consists of 9 icons :
1. 8 icons which display the color palette.
2. The up and down arrow icons, which are used to display the two possible color
palettes.
Inside the drawing zone the cursor is represented by a + sign. The mouse can move
it over the whole screen in order to make selections. The cursor cannot be deleted and
is therefore always visible (whatever the color of the screen), except when the
background is white.
This cursor has two functions :
1. It selects icons when it is used with the mouse, and
2. It picks out the screen coordinates and indicates where to draw, cut, paste or copy
images.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/5
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.4 Clearing the screen
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
CLR
SCRN
Selects the erase screen function.
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
CLR CHNG MOVE DEL
SCRN
BG
MENU MENU
✗ or
✗
Clears the background image.
✗ or
✗
Replaces the background color with the selected color.
CLR
SCRN
CHNG
BG
Note
Changing background color erases the current image.
✗ or
✗
Moves the icon menu from the top to the bottom of the screen
and vice versa.
✗ or
✗
Deletes the icon menu from the screen.
To display the icons on the screen again :
MOVE
MENU
DEL
MENU
• Place the cursor on the left hand edge of the screen and click
the right-hand button on the mouse or,
• Place the cursor in the drawing zone of the screen and press
the space bar or,
• Press <Tab>.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/6
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.5 Exiting the graphics editor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Quits the graphics editor.
Warning
This operation does not automatically save the screen.
Therefore this must be carried out before quitting the graphics
editor, GED.
EXIT
__________________________________________________________________________________________
2.6
Saving or retrieving a screen
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
DIR
DEL
FILE
1.
PIC
2.
File :_
3.
1. Saving or retrieval options,
2. Type of file,
3. Line for entering name of file.
All the screens saved by GED are graphics files and are
automatically given the .pic extension.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/7
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Saves the whole screen to disk, to the file name which has been
entered.
If a file with the same name already exists, the new file
overwrites the old one, after confirmation.
If the file name is not entered or if the memory space on disk
is insufficient, a message is displayed.
✗ or
✗
Retrieves a screen already saved to disk. Do not forget to enter
the file name to be retrieved before carrying out this operation.
If the file name does not exist, an error message is displayed.
✗ or
✗
Displays a list of all files already saved.
The up and down arrows are used to scan the complete list on
the screen.
To select a file :
• Place the cursor on its name and click the left-hand button on
the mouse (it appears in reverse video).
• Place the cursor on GO and click a button on the mouse. Its
name appears on the entry line.
✗ or
✗
Deletes from the disk, after confirmation, the file defined by
name on the entry line. This deletion will not be allowed if
animations are still on the screen. Therefore this operation
must be preceded by deletion of all corresponding screen
animations under ANT (File/Delete command).
DIR
DEL
FILE
Note
Names of logical entities (a:, COM1, LPT1, etc.) and those of the DOS and OS/2 commands, must
not be used as back-up file names.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/8
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.7 Pixel by pixel representation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
✗ or
ZOOM
R
✗
Selects the Zoom function.
To define the zone to zoom :
• Place the cursor inside the drawing zone, where it will be
represented by a small rectangle.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while keeping
the right-hand button depressed.
• Place this rectangle on the section of the image to be
magnified and click the left-hand button on the mouse. This
section of the image is then displayed in the top left of the
screen, in its normal form and magnified pixel by pixel.
• Modify the magnified image (1).
• When all the modifications have been made, place the cursor
in the small frame shown (upper left corner of the image) and
click a button on the mouse.
(1)
To delete a pixel, place the cursor on this pixel in the magnified image, then click the
right-hand button on the mouse.
To modify the color of a pixel :
• Place the cursor on the icon for the chosen color and click the left-hand button on
the mouse.
• Place the cursor on the pixel to be modified in the magnified image and click the lefthand button on the mouse again.
If the color is not present in the palette displayed on the screen, but on the second
palette, exit from the ZOOM function in order to display it. Then return to the function
in order to carry out the color change pixel by pixel.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/9
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.8 Grids
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
Selects the drawing function for a variable size visible grid.
✗
GRID
Displays the following sub-menu :
1.
GRID
1
2
4
5 10 12 20
X
1
2
4
5 10 12 20
Y
1. Type of grid
X Grid divisions in X direction
Y Grid divisions in Y direction
The default options are :
GRID, X = 1 and Y = 1.
✗ or
✗
GRID
Draws a visible grid of variable size on one part of the screen.
To do this :
• Define the X and Y divisions.
• Place the cursor away from the icons and click a button on the
mouse.
The cursor then takes on the shape of a rectangle when it is
in the drawing zone.
• Define the size of the rectangle, by moving the mouse while
keeping the right-hand button depressed.
• Position the rectangle, then click the left-hand button on the
mouse to display the grid on the screen.
Note
When the grid has been defined, it may be copied several
times. In order to do this, repeat the last operation.
✗ or
✗
Draws a visible grid over the whole screen.
To do this :
• Define the X and Y divisions.
• Place the cursor away from the icons and click a button on the
mouse.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/10
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Draws an invisible grid over the whole screen.
To do this :
• Define the X and Y divisions.
• Place the cursor away from the icons and click a button on the
mouse.
When the user moves the cursor in a horizontal or vertical
plane on the screen, it always positions itself on a point of
intersection of the X and Y axes. The position of the X and Y
lines in the grid depends on the division definition.
Note
X and Y correspond to the movements of the X and Y pixels
(and not to a square grid of the X and Y squares).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/11
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.9
Entering text
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
Selects the enter text function.
✗
TEXT
Displays the following sub-menu :
A
0
A
A
6
8 12 18
2.
1
3
3.
5
File : halo107_
1.
4.
1. Character font
2. Character size and direction of writing
3. Thickness of shadow
4. Message guide
✗ or
✗
Selects the associated character font :
• halo107
• f8x8b
• alternative (icon *)
• halo104.
✗ or
✗
Selects the variable character size option. The character size
will be defined by the extendable frame, which is modified by
moving the mouse while keeping the right-hand button
depressed. When the correct size is reached release the
button on the mouse.
A
Note
This option is not active with character font f8x8b.
✗ or
✗
Defines a fixed size for the characters :
6, 8, 12 or 18.
6
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/12
2
Creating background screens (static screens)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Defines the direction for writing text :
• From left to right
• From bottom to top
• From right to left
• From top to bottom
✗ or
✗
Defines the thickness of shadow added when printing text :
• 0 no shadow
0
• 5 widths of shadow (in pixels) maximum
To select the color of the shadow, place the cursor on the upper
part of an icon in the color palette and click the right-hand
button on the mouse.
✗ or
✗
Automatically underlines (in white) text displayed on the screen.
When all the selections for entering text have been made :
• Place the cursor away from the icons and click a button on the mouse. When the cursor
is in the drawing zone, it takes on the shape of a rectangle containing a short line.
• Enter text for inclusion in the screen. As the text is being entered, it appears in a band
and the cursor enlarges to indicate the size of text entered.
• After entering all the text, place the cursor in the position where the text is to appear
and click the left-hand button on the mouse.
Note
Accented characters are not allowed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/13
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.10 Creating symbols
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
SYMBOL
Selects the function for moving part of a screen (cut/paste).
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
SYMBOL
COPY
REPLCE
OVER COMLAY
BINE
SIZE
DIR
DEL
FILE
UNDER
File : symbol_
1.
2.
3.
1. Options, cut, paste, copy, enlarge, etc.
2. Options for reproducing symbols
3. Entry line
✗ or
SYMBOL
✗
Moves part of a screen to another place in the same screen.
To do this :
• Place the cursor in the drawing zone, where it will be
represented by a rectangle.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse with its righthand button depressed.
• Place the rectangle on the part of the image to be moved and
press the left-hand button on the mouse. Keeping the button
depressed, move the mouse to take the selected part of the
image to its new position.
• When the image is in its new location, release the button.
If the SYMBOL option is used with the DRAG option, proceed
as follows :
• Define the size of the cursor while keeping the right-hand
button on the mouse depressed.
• Place the cursor over the part of the image to be moved and
click the left-hand button on the mouse.
• Move the cursor to the new position.
The selected image remains framed by a rectangle.
• Click the left-hand button again to "paste" the selected image
in its new position.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/14
2
Creating background screens (static screens)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
COPY
Copies one part of a screen to another place in the same
screen. To do this :
• Place the cursor in the drawing zone, where it will be represented
by a rectangle.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse with its righthand button depressed.
• Place the rectangle on the part of the image to be copied and
click the left-hand button on the mouse.
• Move the cursor to the new position and then click the lefthand button on the mouse again. To make a second copy,
repeat the last operation, etc.
Note
It is also possible to keep the left-hand button depressed while
moving the cursor. The copy is then produced on releasing the
button.
If the COPY option is used with the DRAG option it is possible
to paint continuously, using the selected object, by keeping the
left-hand button depressed while moving the cursor.
✗ or
SIZE
✗
Redefines the size of a symbol. To do this :
• Place the cursor in the drawing zone, where it will be represented
by a rectangle.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse with its righthand button depressed.
• Place the rectangle over the part of the image to be enlarged
or reduced and click the left-hand button on the mouse.
• Move the cursor away from the selected image and, keeping
the right-hand button depressed, move the mouse in order to
define the new size of the cursor (and thus of the image).
• Position the cursor and click the left-hand button on the
mouse again. The image then assumes its new size inside the
rectangle.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/15
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Saves a symbol to disk (part of the screen defined using an
extendable rectangle). To do this :
• Enter the name of the file to be saved, on the entry line.
• Select the icon opposite.
• Place the cursor in the drawing zone, where it will be represented
by a rectangle.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• Place this rectangle over the part of the image to be saved and
click the left hand button on the mouse.
✗ or
✗
Retrieves a symbol already saved to disk.
There are 2 procedures for this :
The name of the file to be retrieved is known :
• Enter this name on the entry line.
• Select the icon opposite.
• Place the cursor where the symbol is to be located and click
the left-hand button on the mouse.
The file name is not known :
• Select the DIR icon in order to display the directory.
• Select the name of the symbol to be retrieved.
• Place the cursor on GO and click a button on the mouse. The
name of the file appears on the entry line in the sub-menu.
• Proceed as described above.
✗ or
✗
Saves a complete screen to disk.
To do this :
• Enter the name of the file to be stored, on the entry line.
• Select the icon opposite.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/16
Creating background screens (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Retrieves a screen already saved to disk.
There are 2 procedures for this :
The name of the file to be retrieved is known :
• Enter this name on the entry line.
• Select the icon opposite.
The file name is not known :
• Select the DIR icon in order to display the directory.
• Select the name of the file to be retrieved.
• Place the cursor on GO and click a button on the mouse. The
name of the file to be retrieved appears on the entry line in the
sub-menu.
• Proceed as described above.
✗ or
✗
Displays the directory.
The up and down arrows are used to scan the whole list of
saved files on the screen. To do this :
DIR
• Place the cursor on an arrow.
• Click a button on the mouse.
GO confirms the selected name. To do this :
• Place the cursor on the chosen name.
• Click a button on the mouse.
• Place the cursor on GO.
• Click a button on the mouse again.
✗ or
✗
Deletes the specified file from the directory (by enter or by DIR).
✗ or
✗
Reproduces a positive image.
The original symbol is reproduced without modification, using
the SYMBOL, COPY or SIZE functions described previously.
DEL
FILE
REPLCE
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/17
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
The image is reproduced in negative form.
The original symbol is reproduced in negative form, using the
SYMBOL, COPY or SIZE functions described previously.
✗ or
✗
Allows any symbol which is added to remain visible, whatever
the background color used.
For example, if a red circle is added inside a red square, the
circle appears in the selected background color, while the
square remains red.
✗ or
✗
Use of this option with the SYMBOL function allows an image
to be "unpasted" from a background and moved somewhere
else without modifying the image background. To do this :
OVER
LAY
COMBINE
UNDER
• Keep the right-hand button depressed until the image to be
transferred has been defined.
• Move the image while keeping the left-hand button depressed.
When it is in place, release the button and move the cursor
away from the image.
Note
The number of symbols per screen is limited to 225.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/18
Creating background screens (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.11 Assigning color
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
COLR
FILL
Replaces a drawing zone with a colored background or with the
hatched background. To do this :
Colored background
• Select the color by placing the cursor on the icon for the
relevant color and click the left-hand button on the mouse.
• Select the icon opposite.
• Move the cursor onto the zone to be filled in and click a button
on the mouse.
Hatched background
• Select the hatched background by placing the cursor on the
relevant icon (located under the TEXT icon) and click a button
on the mouse.
• Select the icon opposite.
• Move the cursor to the zone to be hatched and click a button
on the mouse. The chosen zone is then filled with hatching.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
2.12
Freehand drawing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
DRAW
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
This option is the default selection when GED is started and is
used to draw freehand.
When this option is selected, freehand drawings can be made
by moving the cursor in the drawing zone while keeping the lefthand button on the mouse depressed.
Moving the mouse with only the right-hand button depressed
allows separate points to be drawn.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/19
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.13 Erasing (eraser)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
Selects the "erase" function which is used to erase in the
drawing zone.
To do this :
ERASE
• If necessary, define the size of the eraser by moving the
cursor in the drawing zone, while keeping the right-hand
button on the mouse depressed.
• To erase, move the eraser over the objects to be deleted while
keeping the left-hand button on the mouse depressed.
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
ERA.
BG
✗ or
✗
This is the default option and erases a color by replacing it with
the selected background color. Choosing the background color
is described in section 2.4.
✗ or
✗
This erases a color by replacing it with the selected foreground
color. Choosing the foreground color is described in section
2.22.
ERA.
BG
ERA.
FG
ERA.
FG
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/20
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Erases one color and replaces it with another color, without
modifying the other colors in the drawing.
To define the colors to be erased and replaced :
• Exit the sub-menu by selecting the function or by placing the
cursor away from the icons and clicking a button on the
mouse.
• If necessary, modify the palette.
• Place the cursor on the upper part of the icon for the color to
be erased and click the right-hand button on the mouse.
This color then appears in the upper part of the icon for
changing color.
• If necessary, modify the color palette and then place the
cursor on the lower part of the icon for the replacement color
and click the right-hand button on the mouse. This color then
appears in the lower part of the icon for changing color.
• In order to actually change colors, move the eraser over the
objects whose color needs to be changed, while keeping the
left-hand button on the mouse depressed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/21
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.14 Plotting lines and polygons
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
✗ or
Selects the plot polygons function, which draws vertical,
horizontal or oblique lines.
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
✗
Plots out polygons (draws vertical, horizontal or oblique lines).
To do this :
• Having selected the icon opposite, place the cursor on the
starting point for the figure and click the left-hand button on the
mouse to define this anchorage point.
• Move the cursor in order to stretch out this point and so plot
a line to the place where a second anchorage point is
required. Click the left-hand button on the mouse to define this
point and fix the line plotted.
• Repeat this operation to define a third anchorage point, etc.
• When the figure has been plotted in full, click the right-hand
button on the mouse to stop the plotting process.
If a mistake is made, use the ERASE icon to erase all or part of
the polygon already created.
Note
If the cursor is positioned outside the drawing zone, the plotting
process is stopped in the same way by clicking the right-hand
button on the mouse.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/22
2
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Plots and fills a polygon with the selected foreground color.
To do this :
• Select the option opposite,
• Define the foreground color by placing the cursor on a color
icon and clicking the left-hand button on the mouse.
• Place the cursor at the beginning of the plot for the figure and
click the left-hand button on the mouse to define the first
anchorage point.
• Move the cursor to the point where the second anchorage
point is required and then press the left-hand button on the
mouse again. The two anchorage points are then connected
by a straight line.
• Draw the rest of the figure by repeating the preceding operation as many times as there are lines to be drawn.
• When the figure has been created, click the right-hand button
on the mouse for the polygon to be automatically filled with the
selected color.
✗ or
✗
Draws curves, starting from a polygon plot. To do this :
• Select the option opposite,
• Define the foreground color by placing the cursor on a color
icon and clicking the left-hand button on the mouse. This color
will be that of the final plot in the form of curves.
• Place the cursor at the start of the plot for the figure and click
the left-hand button on the mouse to define the first anchorage
point.
• Move the cursor to the point where a second anchorage point
is required and then click the left-hand button on the mouse
again. The two anchorage points are then connected by a
straight line.
• Draw the rest of the polygon by repeating the preceding
operation as many times as required.
• Click the right-hand button on the mouse to smooth out the
curves. The polygon is then replaced by a figure formed from
curves with the selected color.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/23
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Redefines a curved line by repositioning one of the initial points
on the curve. To do this :
• Select the option opposite.
• Place the cursor inside the drawing zone and click the lefthand button on the mouse to define the first anchorage point.
• Move the cursor and then click the left-hand button on the
mouse again to define the second anchorage point. A straight
line connecting these two points is then displayed.
• Define all the anchorage points by repeating the preceding
operation, thus producing the figure to be adjusted.
• Place the cursor on the first anchorage point in the figure and
click the right-hand button on the mouse. The figure formed
from straight lines is then replaced by a curve and the first
anchorage point is pinpointed by a small rectangle.
• Move this rectangle to the various anchorage points on the
curve in order to place it over the anchorage point to be
displaced. To do this, click the left-hand button on the mouse.
• Move the cursor to indicate the new position for the anchorage
point selected by the rectangle and then click the right-hand
button on the mouse. The curve is then stretched to that point.
• Repeat the two preceding operations until the curve is drawn
correctly.
• In order to fix the new curve on the screen, click the left-hand
button on the mouse to move the rectangle along the curve
until it disappears.
• Click the right-hand button on the mouse to make the curve
take on the selected foreground color.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/24
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.15 Rotating a symbol or a screen
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
✗ or
Selects the function for rotating an image through 90°.
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
✗
Rotates an image in an anti-clockwise direction through an
angle of 90°. To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a rectangle in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while pressing
down the right-hand button.
• When the rectangle is the required size, place it over the
image to be rotated.
• Click the left-hand button on the mouse to rotate the contents
of the rectangle through 90 degrees. The image is rotated
through 90 degrees for each click on the left-hand button on
the mouse.
✗ or
✗
Laterally reverses a symbol. To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a rectangle in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the rectangle is the correct size, place it over the
symbol to be laterally reversed.
• Click the left-hand button on the mouse to initiate lateral
inversion of the image inside the rectangle.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/25
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Inverts a symbol. To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a rectangle in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the rectangle is the correct size, place it over the
symbol to be inverted.
• Click the left-hand button on the mouse to initiate inversion of
the image inside the rectangle.
✗ or
✗
Laterally reverses the screen. To do this :
• Select the option opposite. This laterally reverses the whole
screen.
✗ or
✗
Inverts the screen. To do this :
• Select the option opposite. This inverts the whole screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/26
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.16 Plotting circles and ellipses
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
✗ or
Selects the function for plotting extendable circles.
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
✗
Draws extendable circles.
To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a circle in the selected color in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this circle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the circle is the correct size, place it inside the screen
and click the left-hand button on the mouse to draw it.
• In order to reproduce several circles on the screen, repeat the
last operation as many times as required.
The color and line thickness parameters of the circle drawn are
those selected.
If this function is used with the DRAG function, it is possible to
"paint" the screen with the specified symbol. To do this, move
the mouse while keeping the left-hand button depressed.
✗ or
✗
Draws extendable ellipses.
To do this, proceed as for drawing extendable circles (refer to
the preceding icon).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/27
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Draws solid circles.
To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a circle with the selected color in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this circle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the circle is the correct size, place it inside the screen
and click the left-hand button on the mouse to draw it.
• In order to reproduce the circle several times on the screen,
repeat the last operation as many times as required.
The color and hatched background parameters of the circle are
those selected.
If this function is used with the DRAG function, it is possible to
"paint" the screen with the specified symbol. To do this, move
the mouse while keeping the left-hand button depressed.
✗ or
✗
Draws solid ellipses.
To do this, proceed as for drawing solid circles (refer to the
preceding icon).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/28
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Draws solid circles with a border.
To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a circle in the selected color inside the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this circle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the circle is the correct size, place it inside the screen
and click the left-hand button on the mouse to draw it.
• In order to reproduce the circle several times on the screen,
repeat the last operation as many times as required.
The color, hatched background and line thickness parameters
of the circle are those selected.
If this function is used with the DRAG function, it is possible to
"paint" the screen with the specified symbol. To do this, move
the mouse while keeping the left-hand button depressed.
✗ or
✗
Draws solid ellipses with a border. To do this, proceed as for
drawing solid circles with a border (refer to the preceding icon).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/29
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.17 Plotting rectangles
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
✗ or
Selects the function for plotting extendable rectangles.
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
✗
Draws extendable rectangles.
To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a rectangle in the selected color in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the rectangle is the correct size, place it in the screen
and click the left-hand button on the mouse to draw it.
• In order to reproduce the rectangle several times on the
screen, repeat the last operation as many times as required.
The color and line type and thickness parameters of the
rectangle drawn are those selected.
If this function is used with the DRAG function, it is possible to
"paint" the screen with the specified symbol. To do this, move
the mouse while keeping the left-hand button depressed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/30
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Draws solid rectangles without a border.
To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a rectangle in the selected color in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the rectangle is the correct size, place it in the screen
and click the left-hand button on the mouse to draw it.
• In order to reproduce the rectangle several times on the
screen, repeat the last operation as many times as required.
The color and hatched background parameters of the rectangle
are those selected.
If this function is used with the DRAG function, it is possible to
"paint" the screen with the specified symbol. To do this, move
the mouse while keeping the left-hand button depressed.
✗ or
✗
Draws solid rectangles with a border. To do this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a rectangle in the selected color in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the rectangle is the correct size, place it in the screen
and click the left-hand button on the mouse to draw it.
• In order to reproduce the rectangle several times on the
screen, repeat the last operation as many times as required.
The color, hatched background, line type and thickness
parameters of the rectangle are those selected.
If this function is used with the DRAG function, it is possible to
"paint" the screen with the specified symbol. To do this, move
the mouse while keeping the left-hand button depressed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/31
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Draws rectangles in three dimensions (perspectives). To do
this :
• Select the option opposite. The cursor then takes on the form
of a rectangle in the selected color in the drawing zone.
• Enlarge this rectangle by moving the mouse while keeping the
right-hand button depressed.
• When the rectangle is the correct size, place it in the screen
and click the left-hand button on the mouse to draw the front
face of the rectangle.
• Next, move the cursor to the place where the rear face of the
rectangle in three dimensions is to be drawn and then click the
left-hand button on the mouse again.
The space between the two drawings is then filled in, creating
a graphic design in three dimensions.
The color, hatched background, line type and thickness
parameters of the rectangle are those selected.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/32
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.18 Selecting line thickness
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
This first icon is used to choose the line thickness from the 6
which are offered.
In order to display the different line thicknesses which are
available, place the cursor on the icon opposite and click on a
mouse button several times to scroll through them.
The line displayed is the one the GED will use when creating
lines or figures (rectangles, circles, polygons, etc.).
__________________________________________________________________________________________
2.19
Selecting the type of line
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
This second icon, located under the ZOOM icon, is used to
select the type of line from the 3 offered.
In order to display the different types of line available, place the
cursor on the icon opposite and click several times on a mouse
button in order to scroll through them.
The type of line displayed is the one the GED will use when
creating lines or figures (rectangles, polygons, etc.).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/33
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.20 Creating special effects
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
DRAG
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Used for continuous "painting" of a figure or symbol.
This function can be used with the SYMBOL function and with
any kind of circular, elliptical or rectangular icon (e.g. extendable
circle, solid ellipse, three-dimensional rectangle, etc.).
Using DRAG with the SYMBOL function
• Select the COPY function under the SYMBOL function.
• Draw the cursor around the symbol to be painted by moving
the mouse while keeping the right-hand button depressed.
• Select the DRAG function.
• Place the cursor at the start of the figure drawn.
• Move the mouse while keeping the left-hand button depressed to paint the figure on the screen.
Using DRAG with a circle, ellipse, etc. icon
• Select the icon wanted and enlarge the cursor to make the
figure the correct size.
• Select the DRAG function.
• Place the cursor at the start of the figure drawn.
• Move the mouse while keeping the left-hand button depressed in order to paint the figure on the screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/34
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.21 Selecting the hatched background
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Selects a hatched background. To do this :
• Select the icon opposite. The hatched background then
appears in the lower part of the status zone.
• Define the foreground color for the hatched background by
placing the cursor on the upper part of the color icon and
clicking the right-hand button on the mouse.
The hatched background icon and the lower part of the status
zone take on the selected color.
• Define the background color for the hatched background by
placing the cursor on the lower part of a color icon and clicking
the right-hand button on the mouse.
The hatched background icon and the lower part of the status
zone take on the selected color.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/35
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.22 Selecting colors
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗
The color selection menu consists of 8 icons for choosing
colors. It is used to select or modify colors.
To select a color, place the cursor on the corresponding icon
and click the left-hand button on the mouse. The right-hand
section of the status zone then takes on the selected color.
✗
This icon for modifying colors is used to choose the second
color palette.
The icons for choosing colors then take on different colors. To
return to the preceding palette, select the icon opposite again.
Note
If the selected definition is 320 x 200 pixels, the colors are
represented by 4 palettes of 4 colors.
✗ or
✗
Displays the following sub-menu :
✗
Replaces one color by another. To do this :
• Define the color to be changed by placing the cursor in the
upper part of the color icon and clicking the right-hand button
on the mouse. The selected color then appears in the upper
part of the color modification icon.
• Define the replacement color by placing the cursor in the
lower part of the corresponding color icon and clicking the
right-hand button on the mouse. The selected color then
appears in the lower part of the color modification icon.
• Select the function opposite. The color of all images or
symbols displayed on the screen is then changed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/36
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Icon
Function
L
R
✗ or
✗
Transposes two colors. To do this :
• Define the first color to be transposed by placing the cursor in
the upper part of the color icon and clicking the right-hand
button on the mouse. The selected color then appears in the
upper part of the color modification icon.
• Define the second color to be transposed by placing the
cursor in the lower part of the corresponding color icon and
clicking the right-hand button on the mouse. The selected
color then appears in the lower part of the color modification
icon.
• Select the function opposite. The 2 colors selected are then
transposed in all images or symbols displayed on the screen.
✗ or
✗
Creates a positive or negative image on the screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/37
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.23 "UNDO" command
__________________________________________________________________________________________
The UNDO command is an additional option for editing work and it cancels or erases the
most recent action since the selection of a drawing icon.
To do this :
• Place the cursor in the status zone on the last icon selected and click a button on the
mouse. The following message is displayed :
Undo?
Left= OK
Right= NO
• To cancel the last action, click the left-hand button on the mouse. The right-hand
button cancels this decision.
Note
To cancel an action, the UNDO option must be selected before selecting another drawing icon.
The UNDO command also saves the screen to memory, together with all its images,
each time a new drawing icon is selected.
This function can be used to jump stages during the creation of an image. It is possible
to modify partly completed screens. When a new drawing icon is selected, the image
which is then displayed in the drawing zone is stored in memory. To store this image on
disk, use the DISKETTE icon in the drawing icon menu.
Note
The <Ctrl-U> keys cancel the current work. The <Ctrl-B> keys store the current image in the UNDO
buffer.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/38
Creating screen backgrounds (static screens)
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.24 Converting an EGA application to a VGA application
__________________________________________________________________________________________
An application designed for a 640 x 350 (EGA) screen definition can be used with a 640
x 480 (VGA) screen definition.
To do this, proceed as follows :
• Select the 640 x 480 (VGA) screen definition on the original application.
• Load the screens one by one under the GED editor, which will propose setting to VGA
format by adding 130 black lines at the bottom of the image (after starting VGA format,
when OK appears, the file is converted even if the current window disappears).
• The animations remain compatible (Section A3 of this manual).
• Start table creation (Section A4 of this manual).
• Transfer the application to the CCX or the PC (Section B2 of this manual).
Note
Since the screen definition is higher, the user has 130 additional lines at the bottom of the screen
to add any information to the drawings.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/39
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/40
______________________________________________________
Defining the animation
Section 3
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.1
Introduction
3/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.2
Animation editor screen
3/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
File management
3/5
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.4
Modifying animations on a previously animated screen
3/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.5
Animating a static object
3/7
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.6
Paint type animation
3/8
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.7
Bargraph type animation
3/11
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.8
Text output type of animation
3/14
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.9
Numerical output type of animation
3/17
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
Text input type of animation
3/21
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.11 Function key type of animation
3/23
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.12 Message box type of animation
3/26
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
A
______________________________________________________
A
Defining the animation
Section 3
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.13 Defining types of variable
3/29
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.14
Testing an animation
3/32
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.15
Managing the mnemonic symbol library
3/33
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.16 Texts displayed mode
3/39
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.17
Exiting the animation editor
3/39
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
3/40
___________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.1 Introduction
__________________________________________________________________________________________
The ANT animation editor is used to define animation on a static screen which has been
drawn previously under GED. It is accessed from the main screen via ANT in the Create
function.
Since animation is attached to a static screen, the first action is to choose a static screen
name from among those which already exist.
The animation operation consists of associating an animated figure with different zones
of the screen. That is to say :
• Selecting the screen zone to be animated.
• Choosing the type of animation : paint, bargraph, text output, numerical output, text
input, function key, message box.
• Configuring the type of animation.
• Confirming the animation.
Note
To delete an animated screen, the following is required :
• Delete all animation, using ANT (see section 3.3 - File management), and
• Delete the file containing the static screen, using GED (see section 2.6 - Saving or retrieving
a screen).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/3
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.2 Animation editor screen
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This screen is accessed from the main PL7-MMI 37 screen by selecting ant in the Create
pulldown menu and is used to define animations on a static screen or to modify existing
animations. When using a VGA screen (640 x 480), the menu bar can be moved from
the top to the bottom of the screen and vice versa either by clicking on it with the righthand button of the mouse, or by pressing the TAB key.
With 640 x 480 definition on a PC VGA screen, the ANT window takes up the whole
screen, and the menu bar masks part of the drawing. It can be moved from the top to
the bottom of the screen and vice versa by pressing the TAB key.
Files Manages files accessed via the ANT animation editor : opening or saving a file.
This item is also used to delete all animations from a screen.
Edit
Enables simple modification of animations on a screen which is
already animated :
• Delete animation.
• Copy animation from one object to another.
• Assign animation to several objects using copy - paste.
• Search for an object on the screen, by name.
Animate
Assigns one of the following animations to the selected static object :
paint, bargraph, text output, numerical output, text input, function key,
message box.
Test
Tests the effect of animation on an object.
Library
Manages the library of animated symbols :
• Create an animated symbol.
• Writes a symbol to the library.
• Use a symbol from the library.
• Cancel a parasitic image of a symbol which has been moved or
erased
• Delete a symbol from the library.
Options
Enables a text field reference to be displayed in reverse video.
Exit
Exits the ANT animation editor.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.3 File management
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Open
Opens a file whose contents are displayed in the ANT drawing zone :
• File previously created under GED and containing a static screen to
be animated.
• File containing an animated screen to be modified.
The screen shown below is displayed when this item is activated.
Select the file to open and confirm with <OK>.
Save
Saves modifications to animations on a screen. This process must be
performed before exiting from the ANT animation editor.
Delete
Deletes all animation on a screen without deleting the screen background. When an application no longer uses a screen, firstly delete all
the animations under ANT, then using GED delete the screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/5
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.4 Modifying animation on a previously animated screen
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Delete
Deletes animation from an object.
Cut
Deletes animation from an object, but preserves the animation
parameters in a register.
Copy
Copies the animation parameters for an object to a register, without
deleting animation from that object.
Paste
Associates animation parameters with an object, these having been
previously saved to a register using the Cut or Copy command.
The Delete, Cut and Paste commands act on the animation of an object.
In every case, the associated object must be selected before erasing, cutting,
copying or pasting animation. This is done by :
• Placing the cursor on the object and clicking the left-hand button on the mouse. The
object is then outlined by 4 selection points.
• Activating the function required by clicking on the relevant item.
Search by symbol
Searches for an object on the screen, by symbol. This is done by :
• Activating the search function by clicking onto it.
• Selecting the name of the object to be searched for on the menu
displayed. The object will then be outlined by 4 selection points, and
the cursor will move onto it.
Search by object
Searches for an object on the screen, by name (for example bar0002,
pnt00003, etc). Follow the same procedure as for a search by symbol.
Comment
A double click on an animated object on the screen displays the animation
parameters. If the object is not animated, it is selected (equivalent to a single click).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/6
3
Defining the animation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.5 Animating a static object
__________________________________________________________________________________________
The internal structure of an image file is of the bitmap type. The drawing is coded by a
group of points, each one of which has a color. Any object (e.g. a circle) thus exists only
as a set of points with no links between them at all.
For this reason, the set of points for a given animation is not defined by the object
itself but by the zone of the screen which frames this object, and which is shown on
the screen by 4 selection points.
In the rest of this document only the word object is used, although it is understood that
animation is applied to the zone which frames the object.
Note
The cursor field indicates the cursor coordinates in relation to the bottom left-hand corner of the
screen :
• X and Y : coordinates are expressed in pixels
• col and line : coordinated in lines/columns in multiples of 8 pixels. This enables positioning of fast
text.
To animate a selected object, ANT offers the following types of animation :
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/7
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.6 Paint type animation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
With this type of animation the color of an object can be changed, according to the value
of a variable in the real-time database of the communication module :
• A binary or analog local variable, or
• A PLC variable (PL7 type variable).
It is possible to define 16 different values, and therefore 16 colors, for each variable
associated with a Paint animation. Each color is selected from a predefined color palette
and may assume a slow or fast blinking attribute.
In the case of a binary local variable, use the first two color palettes which have the
values 0 to 1.
To assign this type of animation to an object :
1. Select the object to be animated by placing the cursor on it and clicking the left-hand
button on the mouse. It is then outlined by 4 selection points.
2. Activate the Paint item in the pulldown menu. The following dialog box is displayed,
ready for entry of the animation parameters.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/8
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Tag
Mnemonic symbol for the variable associated with paint animation,
limited to 13 characters.
This variable may be binary, analog or PL7 :
• If the variable is binary or analog, it is a local variable and all symbols
are then accepted, including addresses of PLC objects.
• If the variable is a PL7 type (PLC variable), the symbol entered must
have been previously defined in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic
symbol database (e.g. VALVE1). It is limited to 8 characters.
Object
Name of the animation. This name, pntxxxx, is defined automatically
by the animation editor. Paint type animations are numbered in
ascending order from pnt0001 to pnt9999.
Blink
This field defines the blinking attributes associated with different
values of the variable :
• NONE, color does not blink
• SLOW, color blinks slowly
• FAST, color blinks quickly
To modify a blinking attribute, place the cursor on it and click the lefthand button on the mouse until the required attribute is displayed
(NONE, SLOW or FAST). The first click selects the attribute and
subsequent clicks cause the various possible choices to scroll past.
To display and define all the blinking attributes (maximum of 16), use
the vertical scroll bar to make the 16 color palettes offered scroll past
(only 4 palettes and therefore 4 blinking attributes are visible at the
same time).
Note : a flashing color takes up CPU time.
Color
This field defines the colors associated with different values of the
variable. Each color is defined from a 16-color palette.
To display all the colors in a palette and to select a color, use the
horizontal scrolling arrows for this palette.
To display all the color palettes, use the vertical scroll bar.
Note
The colors selected must be different from the border surrounding the
animation. Furthermore, the outline of the object to be animated must be
closed, otherwise the filled-in color will go over the edges.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/9
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Value
This field indicates the values of the variable which initiate a change
in color. As soon as the variable has one of the defined values, the
corresponding paint object takes on the associated color and blinking
attribute.
The values (0 to 15) are not entered, but are defined by the system.
Use the vertical scroll bar to display all the values of a variable.
Vertical scroll bar
This is used to display and/or enter or define all the values of a
variable, as well as the associated color and blinking attribute.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering any selections made.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and displays another dialog
box which is used to define the type of variable entered (see section
3.13).
<F1>
This is used to display data in the selected entry field at any time.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/10
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.7 Bargraph type animation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This type of animation is used to represent the value of a variable in the real-time
database of the communication module by a rectangular colored area (a bargraph) :
The area of the bargraph is that which has been selected, outlined by 4 selection points.
If the object is not rectangular, it would be impossible to define a bargraph in this position.
To assign this type of animation to an object :
1. Select the object to be animated.
2. Activate the Bargraph item on the pulldown menu. The following dialog box is
displayed, ready for entering the animation parameters.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/11
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Tag
Mnemonic symbol for the variable associated with bargraph animation,
limited to 13 characters.
The variable may be binary, analog, floating point or PL7 type :
• If the variable is binary, analog or floating point, it is a local variable
and any symbol may be accepted.
• If the variable is a PL7 type (PLC variable), addresses of PLC
objects are not accepted, and moreover, the mnemonic symbol
entered must have been previously defined in the XTEL-SDBASE
mnemonic symbol database (e.g. VALVE1). It is limited to 8
characters.
Object
Name of the animation. This name, barxxxx, is defined automatically
by the animation editor. Bargraph type animations are numbered in
ascending order from bar0001 to bar9999.
Min.
This value is the lower limit of the bargraph and is the limit below which
a variation in the variable is no longer displayed. This limit may be a
value (e.g. 0) or a symbol (e.g. BOT). In the second case it could be
a binary, analog, floating point number or a PL7 symbol.
Max.
This value is the upper limit of the bargraph and is the limit above
which a variation in the variable is no longer displayed. This limit may
be a value (e.g. 100) or a symbol (e.g. TOP). In the second case, it
could be a binary, analog, floating point number or a PL7 symbol.
Direction
This field is used to define the direction in which the bargraph moves :
• from bottom to top,
• from top to bottom,
• from right to left,
• from left to right.
Split or Solid
These define the type of coloration on the bargraph :
Max
Color of Limit 2
L2
L2
L2
Color of Limit 1
L1
L1
L1
BAR color
Min
SPLIT
SOLID
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/12
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Bg Color
This field defines the background color for the bargraph, from a
palette of 16 colors.
To display all the colors in the palette and to select a color, use the
horizontal movement arrows associated with this palette.
Bar color
This field defines the display color for the bargraph, from a palette of
16 colors.
To display all the colors in the palette and to select a color, use the
horizontal scroll arrows associated with this palette.
Colors
This field defines the colors associated with two possible intermediate
thresholds for color changes, each color being defined from a palette
of 16 colors.
To display all the colors in a palette and to select a color, use the
horizontal scroll arrows associated with this palette.
Limits
This field is used to define two intermediate thresholds for color
changes. These thresholds must be defined (0 by default). They are
defined by a constant value or by a binary, analog or floating point
number or by a PL7 symbol.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering any selections made.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and displays other dialog
boxes which are used to define the types of variable defined by a
symbol (see section 3.13) :
• Variable associated with bargraph animation (Variable),
• Upper and lower limits (Min. and Max.),
• Intermediate thresholds (Limits).
Note
The values Max. and Limit 2 are always respectively greater than the values Min. and
Limit 1.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/13
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.8 Text output type of animation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This type of animation is used to display text on the screen, with predefined parameters :
display zone, background color, color and size of the characters.
To assign this type of animation :
1. Select the object to be animated.
Note :
The cursor should be placed precisely on the lower lefthand corner of the first
character displayed when the left button of the mouse is pressed. For fast text
(character size = 4), the position will be forced to the coordinates corresponding to
the lower part of multiples of 8. The line/column cursor helps this positioning.
2. Activate the Output Text item in the pulldown menu. The following dialog box is
displayed, ready for entering the animation parameters.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/14
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Tag
Symbol for the variable associated with text output animation and
containing the text to be displayed on the screen. This symbol is
limited to 13 characters.
Some data, such as date and time, are displayed by using a variable
whose name is predefined : DATE, TIME, DATETIME, etc. (see the
list of variables screen)
The variable for the real-time database in the communication module
is a message type.
Object
Name of the animation. This name, txtxxxx, is defined automatically
by the animation editor. Text output animations are numbered in
ascending order from txt0001 to txt9999.
Bg Color
Symbol for the variable associated with the background color. If the
field is filled (optional), the background color changes dynamically,
the color being specified by the value (0 to 15) of this variable. This
symbol is limited to 13 characters.
The different possible colors, according to the value of this variable,
are as follows :
Color
Black
Blue
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Brown
Light grey
Dark grey
Light blue
Light green
Light cyan
Light red
Light magenta
Yellow
White
Value of the variable
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
If the background color is defined by a variable (name of defined
variable), the color palette (located to the right of this field) is not used.
This variable may be binary, analog or PL7 type.
Bg Color palette
If the background color is not defined by a variable (corresponding
field empty), this palette is used to define the background color, from
16 possible colors. To display all the colors in the palette and to select
a color, use the horizontal movement arrows for this palette.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/15
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Fg Color
Symbol for the variable associated with the color of the characters. If
this field is filled (optional), the color of the characters changes
dynamically, the color being specified by the value (0 to 15) of this
variable. This symbol is limited to 13 characters.
The different colors possible, depending on the value of this variable
are the same as those of the background (see above).
If the color of the characters is defined by a variable (name of variable
defined), the color palette (located to the right of this field) is not used.
This variable is binary, analog or PL7 type.
Fg Color palette
If the color of the characters is not defined by a variable (corresponding field empty), this palette is used to define the color of the
characters, from 16 possible colors. To display all the colors in the
palette and to select a color, use the horizontal movement arrows for
this palette.
Character size
This field defines the character size, using a scale factor of 1, 2 or 3.
Size 4 is used to define the "size 1 fast text" option : the text is
displayed about ten times faster than normal size 1 text (character
size = 1) and is positioned on coordinates which are multiples of 8.
Refer to sub-section 5. 1 in divider H.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the selections made.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and displays other dialog
boxes which are used to define the type of variables defined by a
symbol (see section 3.13) :
• Variable associated with text output animation (Variable).
• Variable associated with the background color (Background). This
variable is optional.
• Variable associated with the color of the characters (Characters).
This variable is optional.
Note
The number of characters which may be displayed depends on the size of the
intended display frame and the selected size of the characters.
The display order will be in the entry order, it is preferable to enter the fast texts
(character size = 4) first.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/16
3
Defining the animation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.9 Numerical output type of animation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This type of animation is used to display numerical values on the screen, with predefined
parameters : display zone, background color, color, size and format of the numerical
characters.
To assign this type of animation :
1. Select the object to be animated.
Note
The cursor should be placed precisely on the lower lefthand corner of the first
character displayed when the left button of the mouse is pressed.
2. Activate the Output Num item on the pulldown menu. The following dialog box is then
displayed, ready for entering the animation parameters.
Output Num
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/17
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Tag
Mnemonic symbol for the variable associated with numerical output
animation and containing the number to be displayed on the screen.
This symbol is limited to 13 characters.
The variable is binary, analog, floating point or PL7 type. The PL7 type
is limited to 8 characters.
Object
Name of the animation. This name, nbrxxxx, is defined automatically
by the animation editor. Numerical output animations are numbered
in ascending order from nbr0001 to nbr9999.
Format
This defines the format of the number displayed on the screen, in the
form of a string of 9's.
For example, 999.99 indicates that numbers are displayed with 3
digits before the decimal point and 2 digits after the decimal point.
Bg Color
Symbol for the variable associated with the color of the background.
If this field is filled (optional), the color of the background is changed
dynamically, the color being specified by the value (0 to 15) of this
variable. This symbol is limited to 13 characters.
The different possible colors, depending on the value of this variable
are the same as those for the background of a text output animation
(see paragraph 3.8 - text output type animation).
If the background color is defined by a variable (name of variable
defined), the color palette (located to the right of this field) is not used.
This variable is binary, analog or PL7 type.
Bg Color palette
If the background color is not defined by a variable (corresponding
field empty), this palette is used to define the background color, from
16 possible colors. To display all the colors in the palette and to select
a color, use the horizontal movement arrows for this palette.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/18
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Fg Color
Mnemonic symbol for the variable associated with the color of
numerical characters. If this field is filled (optional), the color of the
characters changes dynamically, the color being specified by the
value (0 to 15) of this variable. This symbol is limited to 13 characters.
The different possible colors, depending on the value of this variable
are the same as those for the background (see above).
If the color of the character is defined by a variable (name of variable
defined), the color palette (located to the right of this field) is not used.
This variable is binary, analog or PL7 type.
Fg Color palette
If the color of the characters is not defined by a variable (corresponding field empty), this palette is used to define the color of numerical
characters, from 16 possible colors. To display all the colors in the
palette and to select a color, use the horizontal movement arrows for
this palette.
Blink
This field defines the blinking attributes associated with two possible
intermediate thresholds for color changes :
• NONE, the color does not blink,
• SLOW, the color blinks slowly,
• FAST, the color blinks quickly.
To modify a blink attribute, place the cursor on it and click the left-hand
button on the mouse until it is displayed correctly (NONE, SLOW or
FAST). The first click selects the attribute and the subsequent clicks
initiate scrolling of the different possible choices.
Colors
This field defines the colors associated with the two possible
intermediate thresholds for changing color. Each color is defined from
a palette of 16 colors.
To display all the colors in a palette and to select a color, use the
horizontal movement arrows for this palette.
Limits
This field is used to define two intermediate thresholds for changing
color. These thresholds must be defined. They are defined by a
constant value or by a binary, analog, floating point number or PL7
type symbol. The value of Limit 2 should be higher than that of
Limit 1.
Note
The color of displayed digits is as follows :
• Below threshold 1, color defined by Characters,
• From threshold 1 to threshold 2, color defined for threshold 1,
• Above threshold 2, color defined for threshold 2.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/19
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Character size
This field defines the numerical character size, using a scale factor :
1, 2 or 3.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the selections made.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and displays other dialog
boxes which are used to define the types of variable defined by a
symbol (see section 3.13) :
• Variable associated with numerical output animation (Variable).
• Variable associated with background color (Background). This
variable is optional.
• Variable associated with the color of numerical characters (Character).
This variable is optional.
• Intermediate thresholds (Limits). These variables are optional.
Note
The number of characters which may be displayed is fixed by the format, independently of the
intended display frame size.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/20
3
Defining the animation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.10 Text input type of animation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This type of animation is used to define a zone for inputting text or values, with predefined
parameters : background color, color and size of characters.
To perform this type of animation :
1. Select the object to be animated.
Note
The cursor should be placed precisely on the lower lefthand corner of the first
character displayed when the left button of the mouse is pressed.
2. Activate the Input Text item in the pulldown menu. The following dialog box is
displayed, ready for entering the animation parameters.
Input Text
Note
When executed, the text input type animations will be shown in the order they were entered.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/21
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Tag
Mnemonic symbol for the variable associated with input text animation and containing the text to be input and possibly to be displayed.
This symbol is limited to 13 characters.
The variable is a binary, analog, floating point, message or PL7 type :
• If the variable is binary, analog, floating point or message, it is a local
variable and all alphanumeric characters are allowed to define the
symbol.
• If this variable is a PL7 type, addresses of PLC objects are not
allowed. Moreover the symbol entered must have been previously
defined in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic symbol database.
Object
Name of the animation. This name, inpxxxx, is defined automatically
by the animation editor. Text input animations are numbered in
ascending order from inp0001 to inp9999.
Min.
If the variable is not a message type, this field is used to define its
lower limit and thus that of the value to be input (optional). This limit
should always be a value (e.g. 0) and not a symbol.
Max.
If the variable is not a message type, this field is used to define its
upper limit and thus that of the value to be input (optional). This limit
should always be a value (e.g. 1000) and not a symbol.
Bg Color
This color palette is used to define the background color when the
input characters are displayed on the screen. The background color
is defined from 16 possible colors. To display the colors in the palette
and to select a color, use the horizontal movement arrows for this
palette.
Fg Color
This color palette is used to define the color of the input characters
when they are displayed on the screen. The color of the characters is
defined from 16 possible colors. To display all the colors in the palette
and to select a color, use the horizontal movement arrows for this
palette.
Character size
This field defines the size of the characters when they are displayed
on the screen, using a scale factor : 1, 2 or 3.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the choices made.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and displays another dialog
box which is used to define the type of variable entered (see section
3.13).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/22
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.11 Function key type of animation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This type of animation is used to define the various keys on the display console :
assigning a constant value to a variable, changing the status of a bit, moving a task into
the foreground, etc. It is possible to assign functions to the keys F1 to F12, S1 to S12
and to some keys on the numeric keypad (the ENTER key can never be used).
To assign this type of animation :
1. Select the object to be animated.
2. Activate the Function Key item in the pulldown menu. The following dialog box is then
displayed, ready for entering the animation parameters.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/23
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Tag
Mnemonic symbol for the variable associated with function key
animation and assigned by pressing the specified key on the display
terminal. This symbol is limited to 13 characters.
The variable is a binary, analog, floating point, message or PL7 type.
The PL7 type is limited to 8 characters.
Predefined variables may be used to associate a particular action with
a key. For example, DISPLAY 1 to change the current screen, etc.
(refer to section 2 in divider H for the list of predefined variables).
Object
Name of the animation. This name, selxxxx, is defined automatically
by the animation editor. Function key type of animations are numbered
in ascending order from sel0001 to sel9999.
Min.
If the variable is not a message type, this field is used to define the
lower limit of this variable, associated with the actions SET, ADD and
SUB (optional).
This limit should always be a value (e.g. 1000) and not a symbol.
Max.
If the variable is not a message type, this field is used to define the
upper limit for this variable, associated with the actions SET, ADD an
SUB (optional).
This limit should always be a value (e.g. 1000) and not a symbol.
Value
This is used to define the constant value to assign, add to or delete
from the variable, (SET, ADD and SUB actions). It is also used to
define the task to be assigned in the foreground (action FOR) :
• RUNMGR Run-time manager
• GRAPH Graphics task
• TIMER Event and interval timer task
• ALOG Alarm supervisor
• MATHLOG Math and logic task
• TSXCOM Communication task
• TENFT Transfer task.
Note
For a binary variable, only 0 and 1 are permitted.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/24
3
Defining the animation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Action
This is used to define the action associated with the selected key on
the display console :
• ON
: Assigns the value 1 to the binary variable
• OFF : Assigns the value 0 to the binary variable
• TGL : Assigns the values 0 and 1 alternately to the binary variable
• SET : Assigns the value defined by the Value field to the variable.
This action, associated with the DISPLAY 1 variable, brings the
application screen to the foreground (see divider H, section 4).
• ADD : Adds the value defined by the Value field to the variable
• SUB : Subtracts the value defined by the Value field from the
variable
• FOR : Transfers the task indicated by the Value field to the
foreground. The system names for the tasks are always entered in
upper case letters.
Key
This is used to define the key on the display console or the keyboard
which is associated with the action defined by the Action field :
Action field
ESC
TAB
BTB
HME
UP
PUP
LFT
RGT
END
DWN
PDN
INS
DEL
F1 to F12
S1 to S12
NUL
Key on keyboard
<Esc>
<Tab>
<Shift><Tab> (*)
< >
<↑>
< >
<←>
<→>
<End> or <√>
<↓>
< >
<Ins> (*)
<Cancel> (*)
<F1> to <F12>
<S1> to <S12> or
<Shift><F1> to <Shift><F12>
" no key"
(*) these keys are not available on the TSX CPX 2714/3714 operator terminal.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the choices made.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and displays another dialog
box, used to define the type of variable entered (see section 3.13)
Note
If several actions are assigned to one key, the order of execution of these actions
is that in which they were defined. The result could therefore be different depending
on the order of writing the actions.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/25
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.12 Message box type of animation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This type of animation is used to display a message on the screen, chosen from several
messages contained in a file. The message in the list which will be displayed is defined
by the value of an index. Like text output animation, the display uses predefined
parameters : display zone, background color, character color and size.
To assign this type of animation :
1. Select the object to be animated.
Note :
The cursor should be placed precisely on the lower lefthand corner of the first
character displayed when the left button of the mouse is pressed. For fast text
(character size = 4), the position will be forced to the coordinates corresponding to
the lower part of multiples of 8. The line/column cursor helps this positioning.
2. Activate the Message Box item in the pulldown menu. The following dialog box is
displayed, ready for entering the animation parameters.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/26
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Message
Mnemonic symbol for the variable associated with message box
animation. This symbol is predefined by the animation editor (e.g.
B_001001), but can be modified by the user (maximum of 13
characters).
This local variable is a message type.
Object
Name of the animation. This name, bamxxxx, is defined automatically
by the animation editor. Message box animations are numbered in
ascending order from bam0001 to bam9999.
Index Tag
Mnemonic symbol for the variable, whose value acts as the index for
displaying messages on the screen. This symbol is limited to 13
characters.
This variable is a binary, analog or PL7 type.
File
Name of the .BAM file in which messages to be displayed on the
screen are entered. When confirming the parameters for the message
box, a dialog box is used to select this file from the existing list or to
define it.
Bg Color palette
This palette is used to define the background color from 16 possible
colors. To display all the colors in the palette and to select a color, use
the horizontal movement arrows associated with this palette.
Fg Color palette
This palette is used to define the color of the displayed characters
from 16 possible colors. To display all the colors in the palette and to
select a color, use the horizontal movement arrows associated with
this palette.
Character size
This field defines the size of the displayed characters, using a scale
factor : 1, 2 or 3. Size 4 is used to define the "size 1 fast text" option :
the text is displayed about ten times faster than normal size 1 text
(character size = 1) and is positioned on coordinates which are
multiples of 8. Refer to section 5.1 in divider H.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the choices made.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and displays other dialog
boxes which are used to define the types of variable defined by a
symbol (see section 3.13) :
• Variable associated with message box animation (Message),
• Variable associated with the index (Index).
When all the types of variable have been defined, the following dialog
box is used to choose the name of an existing message file or to edit
a new file in order to enter the messages.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/27
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Enter
Cancel
Confirms the xxx.BAM file, selected from the existing list. This choice
appears in the File field of the message box parameters.
Starts the text editor so that messages and the value of the associated
index can be entered :
• The value of the index should be entered in column 0 and be
between -32768 and 32767.
• The character ":" (colon) acts as a separator between the index
value and the associated message.
• The "space" characters at the beginning of the message are
ignored. For these characters to be taken into account, the message
must start with an apostrophe : ', which will not be displayed.
Eg. 2: ' Valve Open.
• The number of characters in the message depends on the size of the
field where it is to be displayed and the size of the selected
characters (maximum of 70 characters).
For example 56 : temperature too high. When the index has the value
56, the message 'temperature too high' is displayed on the screen in
the specified field.
When all the entries have been made, confirm the syntax with the
Confirm command on the File menu (Alt-V). Do not forget to save
the file using the Save command in the File menu (Alt-W).
Note : the F3 exit function automatically confirms this.
.BAM files are directly accessed from the Configuration Manager.
Prevents the .BAM file text editor from being started.
NB : in this case, the selected file has not necessarily been confirmed.
Use the test function to check this.
Note
The text editor used to enter messages is the same as that used by the MATH task to define
procedures. For more information on the commands available with this text editor, please refer
to
section 1 in divider F.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/28
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.13 Defining types of variables (tags)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
When defining an animation, some fields in the dialog box include a variable. A priori,
all variables are considered as sdbase mnemonic symbols. If this is the case, the
communication parameter entry box, described on the following page, is displayed. If
not, the following dialog box, enabling definition of the variable type, is displayed. If
several variables have been entered, this procedure must be followed for each one.
Tag
Reminder of mnemonic symbol for the variable.
Type
Defines the type of variable :
• ANALOG (analog),
• DIGITAL (binary),
• FLOAT (floating point),
• MESSAGE,
• PL7.
A binary, analog, floating point or message variable is a local variable.
It is limited to 13 characters.
A PL7 variable is read from or written to a PLC, via the real-time
database for the communication module. It is limited to 8 characters.
Before defining a PL7 variable it must previously have been defined
in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic symbol database. If not, the
XTEL-SDBASE editor is started in order to assign a PL7 address to
the variable.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/29
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Description
This is used to enter an 80 character comment, associated with the
variable.
If the variable is a PL7 type, and if this field is not filled, the description
associated with the variable is the one which has been entered under
XTEL-SDBASE.
Help
Displays the help screen associated with this dialog box.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the choices made. The
preceding dialog box is displayed again.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box.
If the variable is an analog, binary, floating point or message type :
• If all the variables have been defined, the main animation editor
screen is displayed again.
• If there is still another variable to define, the dialog box is displayed
again in order to define the type.
If the variable is a PL7 type, the following dialog box is displayed in
order to define whether the variable is to be read, written or read and
written :
Note
The only characters permitted for entering the variables are :
• for the first character A-Z, a-z,@,$, _ and #,
• for the other characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9, @,$, _ and #.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/30
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Symbol
Reminder of mnemonic symbol for the variable.
Type
Indicates the type of PLC variable :
• DIGITAL (binary) for a bit object or a bit in a word,
• ANALOG (analog) for a word object.
Marker
(Variable)
The PLC object address entered in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic
symbol database (e.g. W9).
Description
Comment about the variable, entered in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic
symbol database.
Write
Assigns the variable as a write type. In this case the corresponding
box is crossed.
Read
Assigns the variable as a read type and defines the read time : 0.5s,
1s, 2s, 5s, 10s or 30s. In this case the corresponding box is crossed.
Important
The read time should be selected according to how the variable is
used in the application (i.e. the rate of change of the variable).
E.g. monitoring the temperature change in an oven does not need
a period of 1 or 2s. A period of 0.5s should only be used when
absolutely necessary.
Help
Displays the help screen associated with this dialog box.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the choices made. The
preceding dialog box is displayed again.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and returns to the main
animation editor screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/31
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.14 Testing an animation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Test
This displays the effect of defined animations. This
"simulation" does not introduce all the possibilities
offered during execution, but it can help to create a
synoptic summary.
To test an animation :
1. Activate the test function by clicking on the Test item.
2. Click the left-hand button on the mouse to display the animations (the position of the
cursor is irrelevant).
Paint type animation
The selected paint object is displayed in the color corresponding to the value 0 of the
associated variable. With each click of the left-hand button on the mouse, the object
takes on the color corresponding to the next (higher) value of the variable and so on up
to a value of 15.
Bargraph type animation
The selected bargraph object is displayed in a static fashion, divided into zones with the
colors corresponding to those defined during animation :
• From Min. to threshold 1, color defined by the Bar Color field,
• From threshold 1 to threshold 2, color defined for threshold 1,
• From threshold 2 to Max. color defined for threshold 2.
Note
The display appears hatched, even when the bargraph is defined as solid.
Text output type of animation
The selected text output object is displayed with a series of "M's" in the color defined by
the Characters field.
Numerical output type of animation
The selected numerical output object is displayed with a series of 9's, indicating the
defined format (e.g. 99.999).
Text input type of animation
The selected text input object is displayed with a series of "M's", if no limits have been
defined. If limits have been defined, the left-hand button on the mouse may be used to
display them alternately.
Function key type of animation
It is not possible to display the effect of function keys.
Message box type of animation
Each click on the left-hand button on the mouse displays the next message associated
with the selected message box object. The size and font of the characters is that of the
presentation manager, PM, independently of the configured size. If the message file is
not found, the message BAM is displayed.
3. Exit the test function by clicking on the right-hand button on the mouse.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/32
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.15
Managing the mnemonic symbol library
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This function is used to associate an animation with a mnemonic symbol created under
GED and to save the animated symbol thus created in a library. An animated symbol
therefore consists of its background screen, drawn and symbolized under GED, and its
animations.
The animation editor offers the following functions for managing the symbol library :
Create
This is used to create an animated symbol and to save it in the library.
To do this :
Using GED :
• Retrieve the symbols to be used on the screen (see retrieval of
symbols). Retrieving a symbol requires that it has previously been
saved under GED,
• When all the operations under GED have been performed, save the
screen.
Using ANT :
• Display the static screen, created under GED, containing the
symbol(s) to be animated,
• Select the Create item on the Library pulldown menu. A dialog box
then indicates the list of symbols for the screen,
• Select the name of a symbol from this list and confirm it. The
corresponding background screen is then displayed dotted.
• Select the Animate function and define the animations associated
with the selected background screen.
• Save the animated symbol thus created in the library by selecting
Write in the Library pulldown menu.
The name under which the animated symbol is archived must be that
of the symbol defined under GED and with which it is associated. It is
therefore impossible to archive 2 different animations with the same
screen background.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/33
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
• At the end of the create phase, the animated symbol exists in a library, but is not integrated into
the current application. The Read function must be activated to integrate it.
• Message box type animations may be defined by the Create function (symbolization of the
animation). In contrast, the message files have to be edited in each application. They cannot be
common to two applications.
Write
This is used to save an animated symbol in the symbol library. This
function ends any create phase for a symbol. A dialog box is used to
assign a name (32 characters maximum) to each symbol in the form
of a prompt. By default, the "$" character is assigned to the symbol.
Entrez le texte de définition du caractère générique
Vannne
Annulation
Read
Validation
Validation
This is used to read a symbol in the library and to include it on a screen
during an animation process. In order to do this, the symbol is simply
selected from the list offered. The corresponding background screen
symbol is then displayed, outlined by dots. If this symbol exists
several times on the screen, the next instance is shown by clicking the
right-hand button on the mouse.
Delete the instance
This is used to delete from the application all the animations associated
with the instance of the selected symbol. The stages are as follows :
• Select the symbol from the list shown
• Select the instance by clicking on it with the right-hand mouse button
• Delete by clicking with the left-hand mouse button
• Confirm the operation to be carried out.
Cancel the instance
This is used to cancel any display of a symbol which has been moved
or erased.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/34
3
Defining the animation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Delete from library
This is used to delete a symbol from the animated symbols library.
Export a symbol
The "Export a symbol" function displays the following window :
Bibliothèque - Export
Symboles Animés
Exporter vers:
A:\
Validation
Annulation
Aide
The user selects the symbol from the existing list of symbols in the station,
and fills in the complete path for the destination directory.
In practice, only exporting to a diskette is used to import to another
machine.
Disk A : is the default path.
The format for exporting a symbol consists of a directory with the same
name as the symbol, containing all the files defining the symbol.
If the destination disk is missing, the message "Abort, Retry, Ignore"
appears.
If the destination directory does not exist, the message "Cancelled" is
displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/35
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Import a symbol
This is used to import a symbol to the application.
Bibliothèque - Import
Importer depuis:
A:\
Symboles Animés
Validation
Annulation
Aide
The window shown is similar to the one used for exporting.
If the source disk is missing, the message "Abort, Retry, Ignore" appears.
If the source directory does not exist, the message "Cancelled" is
displayed.
If all the files defining the symbol are not present in the source directory,
the message "Incorrect Symbol Cancelled" is displayed.
Abort
Exits the animated symbol library management function at any time. If the
function is abandoned during the create phase, the symbol is not created.
Help
This displays the on-line help associated with the symbol library
management function.
• Next : Displays the next page.
• Previous : Displays the preceding page.
• Exit : Exits on-line help.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/36
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Notes
Creating and reading a PL7 type animated symbol
While the animation is being created, only the existence of the variable in the XTEL-SDBASE
mnemonic symbol database is checked and no PL7 address is associated with it. However, the
read time must be defined. The variable/PL7 address is performed when the symbol is read.
Using the $ and * characters
If the name of the variable entered ends with $ (eg. BUTTON$), the animation box is
displayed each time the animated symbol is called, to define the name of the variable
being used (BUTTON1, BUTTON2, etc.).
If a variable name includes generic characteristics, it must respect the rules for the
names of the variables.
If the * character is entered in the variable field, the animation box is displayed each time
the animated symbol is called, in order to define new parameters.
Deletion of an animated symbol in an application
For the deletion of an animated symbol in an application to be complete, the following
should be performed :
• Delete under ANT all the occurences of the symbol (on all screens and in all positions),
using the Cancel command
• Delete under GED the file containing the screen background for the symbol, using the
SYMBOL/DEL FILE command.
Note : to modify the animation of an animated symbol, this symbol must first be deleted and
a new symbol created.
Example of using the generic character $
1 The example shows the solid state PANEL
screen, drawn under GED and including
several mnemonic PLUNGER symbols to
animate.
2 Library/Create enables this symbol to be
selected in the list of symbols contained in
the screen. The first corresponding screen
background is therefore surrounded by a
dotted line.
3 Select the screen background then define
its animation parameters. The variable
name ends with the character $.
4 Use the Library/Write command to save
the animated symbol which has just been
created.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/37
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5 To include this animated symbol in a screen
during animation, use the Library/Read
command. The first corresponding
background screen is surrounded by a
dotted line, and the following dialog box is
displayed : Confirm position.
6 Use the righthand button on the mouse to
move the dotted line to the following screen
background. The lefthand button displays a
dialog box to enter the character which
replaces the $ and to define the symbol of
the variable associated with the animation.
After Confirmation, the animation
parameters are associated with the screen
background.
Repeat the operations in 5 and 6 for all
the other screen backgrounds of the
animated symbol.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/38
Defining the animation
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.16 Texts displayed
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Options
Options
Textes
visualisés
Texts displayed
From the Option menu it may be possible to activate the "texts displayed" mode.
Texts displayed
This mode is used to display the existing text type animations (Message box, text
output,text input, digital output). The text fields change to reverse video where
the reference letters (M, I or 9) are displayed to facilitate alignment in the
drawing.
This mode is incompatible with certain functions such as the "Library" and
"Delete the instance" functions. It is therefore deactivated.
3.17
Exiting the animation editor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Exit
Exits the ANT animation editor :
• If modifications have not been registered yet, a screen is displayed
to register them. The Register modifications key must be used for
this purpose.
• If the modifications have already been registered, the main
PL7-MMI 37 screen is displayed again.
Resume
This avoids quitting ANT. The current screen continues to be
displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/39
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/40
______________________________________________________
Editing configuration tables
Section 4
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.1
Introduction
4/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.2
Configuration manager screen
4/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.3
Displaying elements in the real-time database
4/5
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.4
Creating reports
4/5
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.5
Exiting the Configuration manager
4/7
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.6
The database
4/8
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.6-1 Introduction
4/8
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.6-2 List of variables
4/9
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.6-3 Cross-references for variables
4/10
_______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.7
COMMUNICATION task
4/11
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.7-1 Introduction
4/11
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.7-2 Variables exchanged between module and processor
4/12
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.7-3
Communication with PLC table
4/13
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.7-4 OFB configuration
4/14
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.7-5 Description of MMI OFB
4/15
___________________________________________________________________________
4/1
A
______________________________________________________
A
Editing configuration tables
Section 4
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.8
Run-time manager
4/17
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.8-1 Configuration table for the system
4/17
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.8-2 Running the Run-time manager in foreground
4/21
_______________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
4/24
___________________________________________________________________________
4/2
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.1 Introduction
__________________________________________________________________________________________
When the graphics task has been configured under ANT, all the other tasks still have to
be configured. To do this, the task Configuration manager (CM) is used to edit the
configuration tables of these various tasks :
• Run-time manager (RUNMGR)
• Event and interval timer task
• Alarm Supervisor
• Math and logic task
• PLC communication task (Tsxcom)
• Optional tasks, etc.
The Configuration manager is accessed from the main PL7-MMI 37 screen using the
CM item in the Create function.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/3
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.2
Configuration manager screen
__________________________________________________________________________________________
This screen is accessed from the main PL7-MMI 37 screen via the Configuration
manager item on the Create pulldown menu and is used to :
• Access the configuration tables of the various tasks,
• Display elements in the real-time database.
View
This is used to display the list of configuration tables, and the list of
elements in the database.
Utilities
This is used to associate a report file with each task on the list (ASCII
text).
Exit
Exits the Configuration manager
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/4
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
4.3 Displaying elements in the real-time database
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Menu
This is used to bring the sub-window which displays the list of
configuration tables into the foreground. To access one of these
tables, select its name on this menu.
Objects
This displays the list of variables in the database (refer to section 4.7
- Database).
X-ref
This displays the list of cross-references for the variables in the
database (refer to section 4.7 - Database).
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4.4 Creating reports
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Note
The Report and Export commands in the Utilities menu apply to all the tables listed in the
Configuration manager menu. The same commands at task level only apply to the task selected.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/5
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Report
This is used to create a text file (ASCII) for each configuration table
listed in the menu, making use of the files in the database. These
xxx.TXT files are used, for example, to display or print the contents of
the configuration tables using a DOS command (TYPE, PRINT). To
do this, CM provides the following dialog box for each table.
Title
This field indicates the heading for the report. CM suggests a default
name which may be modified (maximum of 32 characters).
File-Name
This field indicates the path and the name of the xxx.TXT report file
to be created. CM suggests a default name which may be modified.
Columns/Lines
These 2 fields indicate the format (number of columns and lines) of the
report.
Enter
Confirms the contents of the dialog box and therefore also confirms
the creation of a xxx.TXT file.
Cancel
Cancels file creation.
Help
Displays the help screen for this dialog box.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/6
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Export
This is used to create a text file for each configuration table, making
use of the files in the database. An xxx.EXP file thus created may be
imported from another application or edited using a text editor.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4.5 Exiting the Configuration manager
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Exit
This is used to exit the Configuration manager. The main PL7-MMI 37
screen is displayed again.
Resume
This avoids exiting CM. The current screen remains displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/7
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.6 The database
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4.6-1 Introduction
The real-time database of the MONITOR 37 application contains all the variables
required for the application :
• Variables defined by the user,
• Variables defined by the system (reserved).
The Display menu in the configuration manager can read the database :
• List of variables accessed via the Object item,
• Cross-references for variables accessed via the X-ref item.
Whatever table is displayed, the user has access to certain commands via a command
band or the keyboard :
<Tab> and
<Shift><Tab>
Used to move horizontally between all fields of the table.
< ↓ >< ↑ >
< >< >
Used to move vertically within the current field of the table.
Edit
This menu is used in certain cases to insert or delete a variable :
• Insert
• Delete.
Display
This menu is used to search for a variable in the list :
• Menu : Brings the sub-window menu which displays the list of
configuration tables to the foreground.
• Search : Searches for a string of characters in the field highlighted
by the cursor.
• Next : Recommences the search for the string defined previously by
Search.
• Start database : positions the cursor on the first element in the list.
• End database : positions the cursor on the last element in the list.
Utilities
Used to associate a report file with the table displayed :
• Report : Associates an xxx.TXT file with the table displayed.
• Export : Associates an xxx.EXP file with the table displayed.
This file is edited using a text editor.
Exit
This menu is used to exit the table displayed :
• Exit : The table is no longer displayed.
• Resume : The table remains displayed.
OK
Confirms operations performed (e.g. insert or delete a variable).
Cancel
Cancels operations performed.
Exit
Exits the table displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/8
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.6-2 List of variables
This table, accessed via the Object item, displays all the application variables in
alphabetic order.
Tag name
Name of the variable defined by the user or by the system (reserved
elements).
Type
States the variable type : analog, binary, floating point or message.
Description
Brief comment associated with the variable and entered when it was
defined. For system-defined variables, the comment "reserved" is
given.
Task
Indicates the name of the task for which the variable was originally
defined.
Type
Indicates the type of variable in the real-time database : 0 = binary, 1
= analog, 2 = floating point and 3 = message.
Index
Indicates the position (index) of the variable in the real-time database.
Size
Reserved field.
Other
Reserved field.
Note
The real-time database, loaded in the communication module, is a table which gives the real-time
value of the variables used. Type and index parameters are used to address a variable in this table.
Its mnemonic symbol is not known.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/9
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.6-3 Cross-references for variables
This table, accessed via the X-ref item, displays the list of cross-references for variables
in the database.
Tag name
Names of all the variables, defined by the user or the system and used
for the application. If a variable is used several times its name will
appear several times. The variables are given in alphabetic order.
Rec. nbr.
Record number of the variable in the table. This number is used to
locate the variable in the table.
Used by
Name of the table in which the variable is registered.
Table
This optional field indicates :
• for a graphics task, the name of the screen which uses the variable,
• for the Math and logic task, the name of the procedure which uses
the variable.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/10
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.7 COMMUNICATION task
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4.7-1 Introduction
The Communication task allows the PCM 27 or PCM 37 module to dialog and exchange
data with the PLC processor. It ensures that the following take place :
• From the processor to the communication module, it periodically updates application
variables by reading and then transferring PLC objects to the communication module.
• From communication module to the processor, the PLC processor saves data
introduced by the operator or modified by one of the module tasks (writing values to
the PLC, sending messages, etc.).
In general, the COMMUNICATION task is not configured directly. Thus, the
configuration table depends on PL7 variable definitions.
<Tab> and
<Shift><Tab>
Used to move horizontally between all the fields of the table.
< ↓ >< ↑ >
< >< >
<Alt> <Q>
Used to move vertically within the current field of the table.
If there are several possible choices for the current field of the table,
this command displays a dialog box which lists the possible choices.
<Esc> removes the dialog box.
Edit
• Delete : Used to delete a variable in the list.
Display
This menu is used to search for a variable in the list :
• Menu : Brings the sub-window menu which displays the list of
configuration tables to the foreground.
• Search : Used to search for a string of characters in the field
indicated by the cursor.
• Next : Recommences the search for the string previously defined by
Search.
• Start database : Positions the cursor on the first element in the list.
• End database : Positions the cursor on the last element in the list.
Utilities
This is used to associate a report file with the table displayed :
• Report : Associates an xxx.TXT file with the table displayed.
• Export : Associates an xxx.EXP file with the table displayed.
This file may be imported from another application or edited using
a text editor.
• Import : Used to import an xxx.EXP file from another application.
The objects must exist in the database.
Exit
This menu is used to exit the table displayed :
• Exit : The table is no longer displayed.
• Resume : The table remains displayed.
OK
Confirms operations performed (changing the value of a period, etc).
Cancel
Cancels the operations performed.
Exit
This command is used to exit the table displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/11
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.7.2 Variables exchanged between communication module and processor
TSX Object Type
Access
Size
Designation
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Bi
Digital
R/W
1 bit
Internal bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SYi
Digital
R/W
1 bit
System bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Wi
Analog
R/W
16 bits
Internal word
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
CWi
Analog
R
16 bits
Constant word
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SWi
Analog
R/W
16 bits
System word
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DWi 2
Floating point R/W
32 bits
Internal double word
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
CDWi 2
Floating point R
32 bits
Constant double word
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
R
__Wi,j
__________________________________Digital
____________________________________
___________________________________1
____bit
______________________________Internal
__________________word
____________bit
_______________________________________
CWi,j
Digital
R
1 bit
Constant word bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Oxy,i
Digital
R/W
1 bit
Discrete module output bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Ixy,i
Digital
R
1 bit
Discrete module input bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Ixy,s
Digital
R
1 bit
Module fault bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
OFBi,b
Digital
R/W 1
1 bit
OFB bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
OFBi,w
Analog
R/W 1
16 bits
OFB word
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
OFBi,dw
Floating point R/W 1
32 bits
OFB double word
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Xi
Digital
R
1 bit
Step bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
XMj
Digital
R
1 bit
Macro-step bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
XMj,i
Digital
R
1 bit
Macro-step step bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
XMj,I
Digital
R
1 bit
Macro-step input
step bit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
XMj,O
Digital
R
1 bit
Macro-step output
step bit
1 Can be written to if authorized by the designer of the OFB.
2 These double words enable the exchange of decimal or floating point values,
according to the type of variable defined under XTEL-SDBASE.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/12
4
Editing configuration tables
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.7-3 Communication with PLC table
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu by double clicking on the
COMMUNICATION item.
Mnemonic symbol
This field gives the list of variables which are exchanged between the
communication module and the processor. To add a variable in real
time, position the cursor at the end of the table and enter its
mnemonic symbol in this field. The marker (variable) appears
automatically if the symbol/variable exists in the sdbase.
Otherwise, an error message is displayed. An error message is
also displayed if the symbol already exists in the table, if it is not
being used by a task, or if it is too long.
Marker
This field can only be read. It lists the address associated with the
(Variable)
variable as entered in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic symbol database
(e.g. B10).
Write
This field indicates whether the variable can be written to (YES) or not
(NO) in the PLC. It can be modified.
Period
If the variable can be read, this field gives the defined read period. This
period may be modified (0.5s, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s or 30s).
Reminder
The read period should be defined according to the rate of change of
state of the corresponding variable.
NB
The PL7 variables are removed from the table when they disappear from the
database.
In an empty application (after reinitializing) 6 symbols appear in the communication
table : SYNC94 to SYNC99. These are used for automatically synchronizing the
MONITOR 37 time with the PLC time. If this synchronization is not required, these
6 symbols can be deleted from the communication table.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/13
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.7-4 OFB configuration
If the PLC is a PCX7, the MMIPX OFB must be configured instead of the MMI OFB.
The following information applies to MMI as well as MMIPX.
During operation, communication between the operator dialog communication module
and the PLC takes place via the MMI OFB, which has to be configured. This consists of
declaring, in PL7-3, the type of MMI OFB and the number of OFBs used. These OFBs
are dedicated, and the number configured must be the same as that of the module used.
For example to use the PCM_3 module, 3 OFBs must be configured :
• Starting from the SELECT CONFIGURATION MODES screen, select item 5 OPTIONAL FUNCTION BLOCKS. The CONFIGURATION OF OPTIONAL FUNCTION
BLOCKS screen displays the list of types of OFB already declared and the number
of OFBs per type.
• If the MMI OFB is not on this list, press the dynamic key [NEW OFB]. A new screen
then displays the list of OFBs available on the hard disk. Use the [PREV FAM] and
[NEXT FAM] commands to display the various families and the [INS] command to
select the type of MMI OFB.
• After confirming the selection, the CONFIGURATION OF OPTIONAL FUNCTION
BLOCKS screen is displayed again. The [MODIFY] command is then used to define
the number of OFBs to use (the same as the number of operator dialog modules).
For more information, refer to the PL7 Operating Modes manual, Ref. No.
TXT DM PL7 3 V5E.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/14
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.7-5 Description of MMI OFB
This function block supervises the PL7-3 variables which have been configured in the
operator dialog applications of the TSX PCM modules which have been installed in the
local station. It does not have input parameters and operates independently of the PL73 program. It is activated automatically at the end of each cycle of MAST task (whether
the PLC is in STOP or in RUN).
Each TSX PCM module in the local station (maximum of 4) is associated with an OFB
(MMI0 to MMI3), which is configured in the same way as all other OFBs in order to be
integrated in the PLC application and initialized at the start-up of the operator dialog
application associated with it.
Presentation of MMIi OFB
MMIi
START : bit
STATUS : dword
MODULE : word
Internal
data
Outputs
MAXTPS : word
Description of the parameters
• Input parameters : none
• Output parameters
START
This bit indicates if the OFB is activated or not. It is modified by
a request transmitted from the associated TSX PCM module :
0 : communication interrupted or OFB being initialized,
1 : communication operational.
STATUS
This double word indicates possible operating errors in the OFB
(see the following list of faults).
MODULE
This word indicates the module number of the associated TSX PCM
module.
• Internal data
MAXTPS
This word contains the time consumption setting (in ms) on the
PLC cycle.
• Internal constants : none to be used by the user. The internal constants of the OFB,
accessible in PL7-3 (CONSTANT mode) should not be modified.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/15
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
List of faults : STATUS word
bit0 = 1
bit1 = 1
bit2 = 1
bit3 = 1
bit4 = 1
bit5 = 1
bit6 = 1
bit7 = 1
bit8 = 1
Work space allocation is impossible
Communication is interrupted
No logic gate on the PLC processor
The TSX PCM module no longer responds
The OFB has not been configured (initial state)
The configuration of the OFB is invalid
The shared memory of the module (SMU) is overloaded
Update rate is not respected
Application identifier is invalid
Volume of data in communication
The MMI.BIN file must not exceed 64 Kbytes (32 Kwords) for the 4 TSX PCM modules.
This restricts reading to approximately 6000 variables.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/16
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.8 Run-time manager
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4.8-1 Configuration table for the system
Configuring the system consists of defining, for all existing tasks, the memory space to
reserve and a certain number of options (system, run, foreground task, permission and
priority level options). The system defines values by default which do not generally need
to be modified by the user.
If modification is required, the Configuration manager offers the System Configuration
table, which is accessed from the following menu :
Flags
This field indicates the options associated with each task. Default
options offered by the system may be modified.
System option S
Allocates a space for the task in the task table. This option must not
be modified.
Run option R
Activates the task to start execution of the application. All tasks
possess option R by default and are, therefore, automatically active
when the system is started up. However, it is possible to delete this
option.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/17
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Foreground task option F
Brings a task to the foreground when execution of an application
starts. Obviously this option can only be associated with one of the
following tasks ; Configuration management, Alarm management
and Graphics.
It is important to set the parameters for option P, using option F, to
execute the task in the foreground.
Permission option P
This allows the task to be executed in the foreground.
Priority level 1-4
Defines task priority. This parameter is used to program the order in
which the tasks must start and end. The sequence for the tasks is as
follows :
1. Run manager
2. Tasks with priority 1
3. Tasks with priority 2
4. Tasks with priority 3
5. Tasks with priority 4
6. Tasks without a specific priority
7. The foreground task
This option is not compulsory. If it is not configured, the tasks start in
the order in which they are shown on the screen.
The sequence for stopping tasks is the same, but in reverse order to
that for carrying out tasks.
Task name
This field gives the task name and cannot be modified :
• RUNMGR
Run-time manager
• GRAPH
Graphics task
• TENFT
File transfer task
• TIMER
Event and internal timer task
• TSXCOM
PLC communication task
• ALOG
Alarm Supervisor
• MATHLOG
Math and logic task
Description
This field gives the name or the function of the task in plain language.
It is this name which appears in the RUNMGR task manager screen
during execution.
Database [Kb]
This field gives the minimum memory size (not including data)
required for the task. This value may be modified (from 0 to 256
inclusive).
Certain tasks can only use part of the displayed size (for example
MATHLOG which uses about 218 Kb).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/18
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Database ?
This field defines whether or not a memory space is reserved for the
task :
• YES : A memory space is reserved for the task :
M = BASE + ∑Nx.Cx
• NO : If ∑Nx.Cx = 0, no memory space is reserved. Since the task
does not have any data, it cannot be executed.
C1 to C10
Do not modify these coefficients.
Sigma
Reserved field, represents ∑Nx.Cx.
Description
This field gives the name or the function of the task in plain language.
It is the name which appears during execution in the RUNMGR Runtime manager screen.
For this task, the following commands are offered via the command band or the
keyboard :
<Tab> and <Shift><Tab>
Used to move horizontally between all the fields of the table.
< ↓ >< ↑ >< ><
>
Used to move vertically within the current field of the table.
< ←>
Used to erase the contents of the selected field.
Edit
This menu is used in certain cases to carry out operations on lines of
the table :
• Insert : Inserts a line in the table.
• Delete : Deletes the current line.
• Copy : Used to copy one or several lines of the table to a buffer
register. To do this :
- Copy : Defines the start of the zone to be copied by the position of
the cursor.
- < ↓ >< ↑ > : Defines the block to be copied.
- Copy : Saves the block to a buffer register.
• Cut : Used to transfer one or several lines of the table to a buffer
register. This command uses the same procedure as copying.
• Paste : Retrieves the contents of the buffer register, previously
saved by the Copy or Cut command.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/19
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Display
Utilities
This menu is used to search for a variable in the list :
• Menu : Brings the sub-window menu for displaying the list of
configuration tables to the foreground.
• Objects... : Displays the list of variables in the database.
• X-ref... : Displays the cross-references for the variables in the
database.
• Search : Used to search for a string of characters in the field
indicated by the cursor.
• Next : Recommences the search for the string previously defined for
Search.
• Start database : positions the cursor on the first element in the list.
• End database : positions the cursor on the last element in the list.
Used to associate a report file with the table :
• Report : Associates an xxx.TXT file with the table displayed.
• Export : Associates an xxx.EXP file with the table displayed.
This file may be imported from another application or created using
a text editor.
• Import : Used to import an xxx.EXP file from another application.
Exit
This menu is used to exit the table displayed :
• Exit : The table is no longer displayed.
• Resume : The table remains displayed.
OK
Confirms operations performed (e.g. modifying the contents of a
field).
Cancel
Cancels operations performed.
Exit
This command is used to exit the table displayed.
Help
Accesses on-line help in the table :
• Extended help...
F1
• Help with the Field...
Alt-F
• Help with Errors...
Alt-E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/20
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.8-2 Running the Run-time manager in foreground
The foreground task, declared with the F attribute during system configuration, is
displayed when the application is started :
• The communication module is powered up with a cartridge containing an application.
• The application is run from the main menu of the permanent user service (key F8).
When the RUNMGR task is executed in foreground, the following screen is displayed :
MONITOR 37
Task
RUNMGR
GRAPH
TENFT
ALOG
BAM
TIMER
MATHLOG
HELP
Message
Status
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Running
Running
Running
Running
Running
Running
9
Running
(1+0+0=1
Size
44K
180K
42K
80K
30K
50K
100K
60K
alarms initialized )
Conventional memory: 269K of 282K in use (largest piece is
Expanded memory: 464K of 1792K in use (largest piece is
13K).
256K).
586K
F2
F5
F6
F9
F10
SHUTDOWN-M37
START-STOP TASK
SET-PASSWORD
SET-DISPLAY
SET-TASK
Copyright (C) 1984-89 U.S.DATA/Telemecanique
All Rights Reserved
Task
List of tasks loaded in the communication module :
• RUNMGR : Run-time manager
• GRAPH : Graphics task
• TENFT : File transfer task
• ALOG : Alarm Supervisor
• BAM : "Message box" task
• TIMER : Event and interval timer task
• MATHLOG : Math and logic task
• HELP : On-line help for the task (optional)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/21
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Status
Defines task status :
• Active : The task is being executed and is proceeding correctly.
• Inactive : The task is not being executed. It has been deactivated
by the user or has encountered a serious error.
• ERROR! : The task has encountered a minor error. Execution of the
task is not interrupted and the error condition is indicated but
ignored.
Message
Displays messages relating to the task (operating and error messages).
Size
Indicates in bytes the space reserved for the task (size declared by
PL7-MMI 37 during system configuration). The TIMER task uses a
fixed memory space so the size declared by PL7-MMI 37 is irrelevant.
Unused
Indicates, for certain tasks, the number of unused or available bytes.
Cycle
This performance indicator gives the number of times the real-time
database is accessed during a given period.
Conventional memory
Indicates in Kbytes, the total space available in conventional memory,
and the space already used. The value in brackets represents the
space still available (difference between total available space and
space already used).
Expanded memory
Indicates in Kbytes, the total available space in paged memory (EMS)
and the space already used. The value in brackets represents :
• either the maximum usable space for a task (272 Kb),
• or the maximum remaining space (if less than 272 Kb).
<F2>
SHUT DOWN-M37
This function key is used to stop the application. This operation is
protected by the operation password (defined by PL7-MMI 37 or
locally). If the password is entered correctly, the message Accepted
is displayed on the screen, all the tasks are interrupted and the
application is stopped. Otherwise, the message Rejected is displayed
on the screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/22
Editing configuration tables
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
<F5>
<F6>
STOP/START TASK
This function key is used to modify the status of the selected task. It
toggles between Active and Inactive status. This operation is protected by the operation password.
To select a new task and to modify its status, use the up and down
arrows.
SET-PASSWORD
This function key is used to modify the operation password (defined
by PL7-MMI 37). Since this operation is protected, the current password must be entered and confirmed before entering and confirming
the new password.
Entry is limited to 8 alphanumeric characters; the blank character
(space) may be used. By default, there is no password ("empty"
password).
<F9>
SET-DISPLAY
This function key is used to select data displayed in the last field on
the screen : Size (displayed by default), Unused or Cycle (see
description above).
<F10>
SET-TASK
This function key is used to bring another allowed task to the
foreground : GRAPH, TENFT, ALOG, HELP, etc. To select the task,
use the up and down arrows.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/23
A
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/24
______________________________________________________
Contents part B
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
Creating the cartridge image
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Introduction
Creating application files
Defining the operation password
Selecting tasks and files
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
Transferring the created tables
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
2/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Creating/reading a local cartridge for TSX PCM 27 or 37
2.3 Creating local diskettes for CCX
2.4 Uploading/downloading an application
2.5 Comparing two applications
2.6 Displaying a directory on the target machine
2.7 Executing the transfer task in foreground
___________________________________________________________________________
B/1
B
___________________________________________________________________________
B
___________________________________________________________________________
B/2
______________________________________________________
Creating the cartridge image
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Introduction
1/2
_________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Creating application files
1/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.3
Defining the operation password
1/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.4
Selecting tasks and files
1/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/10
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
B
Once an application has been created (all tasks have been defined), it has to be
transferred, either to the TSX PCM 27 or 37 communication module cartridge, or to the
CCX 57 or 77, or to the PC compatible microcomputer depending on the case, so that
it can be executed. After selecting the tasks, transfer the application with "Create tables"
either in local or connected mode. This operation can be also be performed in two stages
:
1. Generating the image, which consists of creating executable files to be transferred
to the target machine.
2. Transferring the actual files :
- in local mode, via the cartridge programmer for TSX PCM 27 or 37 modules, or via
a diskette transfer for CCXs.
- in connected mode, via the terminal port of the PLC processor or via the MAPWAY,
ETHWAY, FIPWAY, FIPIO or UNI-TELWAY network.
The image generation function is accessed via the Generate pulldown menu on the main
PL7-MMI 37 screen.
Note
When files are transferred to the module, if a task has been modified, the operations to create the
tables (select the tasks and transfer them to the target machine) must be performed again.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Creating the cartridge image
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Creating application files
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Creating tables
This is used to create executable files to be transferred to the
communication module cartridge.
This operation must be performed before transfer to the
cartridge, each time one of the tasks has been modified (via
the Create menu).
The following dialog box is displayed in order to follow the sequence
of operations.
When all the tables have been created, the message PROCESS
FINISHED is displayed. An error or data message may also appear
(e.g. Memory reconfiguration required).
OK exits the dialog box when the operation has finished and displays
the list of tasks to be transferred to the target machine. This list must
be confirmed.
Note
Select Table creation with coherence to check coherence with XTEL-SDBASE, before creating
executable files (refer to section 2.7 in main section C).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.3 Defining the operation password
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Password
This is used to define or modify the password required for the transfer
and checking functions which access the communication module
(Operation). When modifying a password, entries must be made in
the following order :
• Previous password
• New password
• Confirmation of the new password
B
Entries are limited to 8 characters including blanks (spaces). By
default, there is no password ("empty" password) prior to entering the
first password. This option may be maintained or modified.
Note
This password is also used :
• during operation to stop the application and to stop or start the various tasks.
• with ADJUST option, in order to modify the value of an object.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Creating the cartridge image
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Previous password
The password to be modified is entered here (no password the first
time).
New
The new password is entered here.
B
Confirmation
Confirms entry of the new password. Thus, this entry must be identical
to the one in the New field.
OK
Confirms the entries. The system checks that the old password is
correct and that the new word and its confirmation are identical. If this
is so, the new word is registered instead of the old word. If not, the old
password is retained.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the entries. The old password
is retained.
Help
Displays the help screen for the dialog box.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.4 Selecting tasks and files
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting tasks
This is used to select the list of files to be transferred. The choice of
task selects all of the files associated with that task. This procedure
for selecting tasks must be repeated whenever a modification
entails creating a new file. The RUN MANAGER task must always
be selected.
B
When a task is selected, by clicking on the relevant name, it appears
in reverse video. The names which are already in reverse video when
the dialog box is first displayed correspond to the preceding confirmed
selection.
OK
Confirms the selections made.
If no selection is made, a dialog box offers "boot" files (Yes response)
for selection. This then creates a "bootable" cartridge after transferring
the files, when using a TSX PCM 27 or 37.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering the selections made. The
previously defined list, corresponding to the pre-selected names, is
retained.
Help
Displays the help screen for the dialog box.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Creating the cartridge image
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Selecting Files
This is used to modify the list of files resulting from task selection, and
displayed in the window located in the left-hand section of the dialog
box. The up and down arrows or the window scroll bar are used to
display the whole list.
When this function is activated, all the files in the list are selected and
therefore appear in reverse video. It is then possible :
• either to delete files from the list,
• or to add files to this list.
Deleting a file
A file can be deselected from the list by a single click on its name. It
no longer appears in reverse video and the file will not be transferred.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/7
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Adding a file
The fields located in the right-hand section of the dialog box are used
for this. When they have been duly completed they are registered by
pressing Enter. A file added in this way appears at the end of the list.
B
Source directory
This is used to define the access path (directory) of the file(s) to be
added.
The application or operator dialog access paths are specified by a
meta-character. The first character entered is, therefore significant :
~specifies the MMI access path for the (D:\XPROPRJ\
project\station\MMI) station
! specifies the access path for the
(D:\XPROPRJ\project) project
/ specifies the (C:\XPROSYS) XTEL system access path
\ specifies that the access path is the one which was entered
(e.g. \C:\DOS)
Any other character specifies the access path for the communication
module currently being configured (e.g. D:\XPROPRJ\project\station\
MMI\DOP_1).
Target directory
This is used to define the absolute access path to the communication
module (without the logical drive name) where the additional file(s)
are to be installed.
If this field is not specified, but if a target machine access path is
entered in the source directory field (D:\XPROPRJ\project\station\
MMI\DOP_i where i = 1 to 4), the system defines the target directory
of the module as follows. The target directory is equal to the absolute
source directory (without a logical drive), with the string
\XPROPRJ\project\station\MMI\DOP_i replaced by FLINK.
If this field is not specified and if the system does not find the string
DOP_i (i = 1 to 4) in the source directory field, an error message
appears on the screen. Thus, this field must be specified.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/8
Creating the cartridge image
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Files
This is used to define the name(s) of the file(s) to add to the list. It is
possible to use meta-characters to enter in this field :
* Replaces all the characters
(e.g. DE*.TXT, TEST.* or *.*),
B
? Replaces a single character
(e.g. TEST?.TXT),
Enter
Confirms the entries and initiates registration of the files in the list. The
files which are added appear at the end of the list. If there is an error
a message appears on the screen.
OK
Exits the dialog box by confirming the selected list.
Any modifications (deletion or addition of files) are registered.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without registering any modifications.
Help
Displays the help screen for the dialog box.
Note
When making a new selection of tasks, any modifications made to the file selection (e.g. the addition
of files) are lost. Only files for selected tasks will be present in the list.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/9
_______________________________________________________________________________________
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/10
______________________________________________________
Transferring the created tables
Section 2
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.1
Introduction
2/2
_________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
Creating/reading a local cartridge for TSX PCM 27 or 37
2/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
Creating local diskettes for CCX
2/5
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.4
Uploading/downloading an application
2/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.5
Comparing two applications
2/8
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.6
Displaying a directory on the target machine
2/9
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.7
Executing the transfer task in foreground
2/10
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
2/10
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
B
The generated tables transfer function is used to transfer the application (the selected
files), to a cartridge or to the hard disk (backing up the application). It is accessed from
the Transfer pulldown menu of the main PL7-MMI 37 screen.
The menu for the transfer function differs depending on the target machine selected :
• Transfer menu for a TSX PCM 27 or 37 module
• Transfer menu for a CCX 57 or 77, or an IBM PC compatible microcomputer
Transfert
Création disquettes locales
Chargement / déchargement
Comparaison
Répertoire
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Transferring the created tables
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.2 Creating/reading a local cartridge for TSX PCM 27 or 37
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Creating a local cartridge
This is used to transfer the application or its backup to a cartridge
located in the cartridge programmer.
APPLICATION to the LOCAL CARTRIDGE
The transferred application is the one defined by the list of files.
BACKUP THE APPLICATION to the LOCAL CARTRIDGE
The transferred application is the application backup, whose files
are
saved
to
the
D:\XPROPRJ\project\station\MMI\DOP_i\BACKUP directory.
with Create tables
This option is used to generate all the tasks before transferring (see
Section B1). The transferred tasks are those selected from the "Task
selection" menu.
OK
Starts transfer of the selected application (application or application
backup) to the IMDSK.DAT file. The selection screen for the memory
cartridge module to be written to is displayed and then the dialogue
box for starting the PROM PROG tool.
Cancel
Abandons the transfer operation. The files are not then transferred.
Help
Displays the help screen for local writing to a cartridge.
Note
When several local cartridges are created, only the last application is backed up. This applies to
the whole X-TEL Software Workshop.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/3
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Reading a local cartridge
This is used to transfer the contents of the cartridge, located in the
cartridge programmer, to the backup zone on the disk
(D:\XPROPRJ\project\station\MMI\DOP_i\BACKUP directory).
B
Cartridge type
Indicates the type of cartridge and whether or not it is a system
cartridge (bootable).
Creation date
Indicates the date the cartridge was formatted.
Hour created
Indicates the time the cartridge was formatted.
Available space in the cartridge
Indicates, in bytes, the space still available in the cartridge.
Module supporting the application
Summary of the application defined during selection of the
communication module.
PROMPROG data
Provides data on reading the cartridge.
For example, The cartridge was not read, if there is no cartridge in the
programmer or if the programmer is absent.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/4
Transferring the created tables
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
List of extracted files
After activating the Extract Files key, this window lists the files present
in the cartridge. The up and down arrows are used to display the whole
list.
Extracting Files
Starts to read the files. The list then appears in the List of extracted
files window.
OK
This key appears after extraction of the files. It enables you to quit the
function.
Cancel
Aborts the local read operation.
Help
Displays the help screen for local reading of a cartridge.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
Creating local diskettes for CCX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This function is used to create a diskette which can be loaded into the
drive of the target machine.
It will be loaded into the CCX via the F9 "Load Application" function
in the Main Menu screen.
This diskette is not an application backup diskette
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/5
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.4 Uploading/downloading an application
_______________________________________________________________________________________
B
Uploading/downloading
This is used to transfer the application or its backup to the target
machine. This transfer requires that the terminal be connected to the
PLC, via the terminal port on the PLC processor.
Access to uploading/downloading is protected by the same password, previously defined for the Generate pulldown menu.
After entry and confirmation of the password, an error message will
appear on the screen if it is not correct. After three incorrect entries,
the transfer function is aborted.
If the password entered is correct, the following dialog box is displayed :
APPLICATION to Target
The application transferred to the target machine will be the one
defined by the list of files.
The target machine address is the one entered on the selection
screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/6
2
Transferring the created tables
_______________________________________________________________________________________
APPLICATION BACKUP to Target
The application transferred to the target machine is the application
backup (...\BACKUP directory).
Target to APPLICATION BACKUP
The application saved to the target machine is transferred to the disk
backup zone (..\BACKUP directory).
OK
Starts execution of the selected transfer : backup, upload or download
the application.
Cancel
Abandons the transfer operation. The files are not transferred.
Help
Displays the help screen for uploading or downloading an application.
Note
For a TSX PCM 27 or 37 module, before transferring to a blank cartridge in connected mode,
the cartridge must be formatted.
The formatting command is available on the control screen, which is accessed :
• either from the Control pulldown menu in PL7-MMI 37
• or locally from the operator terminal.
Transfer to the target machine
To transfer the application to the target machine, first ensure :
• if an application is already present on the target machine and it is in
STOP mode, that the MAIN MENU screen is displayed,
• if the application is in RUN mode, that the TENFT task is loaded and
active. If not, the message "target not configured, or not ready or
failed" is displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/7
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.5 Comparing two applications
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Compare
Used to compare the application with the one saved in the backup
zone or in the target machine.
B
Application and Application backup
The application is compared with the one saved in the disk backup
zone (D:\XPROPRJ\project\station\MMI\ DOP_i\BACKUP directory).
Target and Application
This comparison is carried out in connected mode. The application is
compared with the one saved in the target machine.
Target and Application backup
This comparison is also carried out in connected mode. The application
saved in the disk backup zone (..\ BACKUP directory) is compared
with the one saved in the target machine.
OK
Starts comparing the selected applications. When this has finished,
a message indicates the result of the comparison.
Cancel
Aborts the Compare function.
Help
Displays the help screen for comparing two applications.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/8
Transferring the created tables
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.6 Displaying a directory on the target machine
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Directory
Used to display the list of files from the terminal on the target machine
with indication of the access path. This function requires that the
terminal is connected to the target machine (via the processor
terminal port or MAPWAY, ETHWAY, FIPWAY or FIPIO port).
Directory
Used to enter the directory (access path). For all cartridges with
memory size not exceeding 2 Mbytes, the logical drive is B:.
OK
Confirms the syntax of the access path to the directory entered and
displays the directory contents.
Exit
Abandons the Directory function.
Help
Displays the help screen for this function.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/9
B
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.7 Executing the transfer task in foreground
_______________________________________________________________________________________
When the TENFT transfer task is executed in foreground, the following screen is
displayed :
B
01:00:34
File tranfer
****
Operation ........:
File name ...:
Size of file :
Bytes transferred :
Server waiting
Tue 23/10/1991
****
0 bytes
0 ( 0 %)
Status ...........:
F1
F10
Previous screen
Task manager
Copyright (C) Telemecanique 1989/1991 V 0.90, all rights reserved.
Operation
Indicates the type of transfer taking place.
File name
Indicates the name of the file transferred.
Size of file
Indicates in bytes, the size of the transferred file.
Bytes transferred
Indicates the number of bytes already transferred, and also the
percentage.
Status
Indicates the transfer status.
Remote name
Indicates the remote name : PL7-MMI in the case of a transfer
from PL7-MMI 37.
<F1>
Previous screen
This function key is used to return to the previous screen.
<F10>
Task manager
This function key is used to display the RUNMGR task management
screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/10
______________________________________________________
Contents part C
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
Control
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Introduction
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
Utilities
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
2/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Introduction
Selecting a new machine
Clearing an application
Adding options
Saving/retrieving an application
Application documentation
Checking coherence
Deleting files
___________________________________________________________________________
C/1
C
___________________________________________________________________________
C
___________________________________________________________________________
C/2
______________________________________________________
Control
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Introduction
1/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/4
C
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The Control function is used to display in real time, data on the operator dialog machine
and on the display panel. It is also used for certain commands on this machine
(initialization, stop, run application).
To display this data on the screen, the following are required :
• The terminal must be connected to the target machine.
• Communication between the terminal and the communication module must be
initialized.
C
The Control function is accessed from the Control pulldown menu on the main
PL7-MMI 37 screen.
Since this function has access to the "operation", it is protected by a password (as with
the upload/download function).
If the password which is entered and confirmed is not correct, an error message appears
on the screen. After three incorrect entries, the Control function is aborted.
If the password is correct, the following screen is displayed for a TSX PCM 27 or 37
module :
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Control
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
When connected to a CCX 57 or 77, or a PC compatible microcomputer, the screen is
as shown below :
C
Front panel of the operator dialog communication module for TSX PCM 27 or 37
The real time display on the front panel of the communication module
indicates the status of its display lamps : RUN, CPUF, MEM, I/O.
PCMxx
Indicates the type and version of communication module :
TSX PCM 27 or TSX PCM 37.
Screen
Indicates, when using a TSX PCM 27 or 37, the type of display
console :
Color, Monochrome or absent (if there is no display console).
Cartridge
Indicates, when using a TSX PCM 27 or 37, the type of communication
module cartridge :
Commands
The 4 buttons in this window are used to define a command to be
executed on the target machine :
• Run : Executes the application.
• Stop : Stops executing the application.
• Init : On TSX PCM 27 or 37, initializes the application (Reset).
• Format : On TSX PCM 27 or 37, formats the cartridge.
Report
Displays confirmation of connection to the target machine and the
commands.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
OK
Starts execution of the command selected in the Command window.
Cancel
Aborts the Control function.
Help
Displays the help screen for the Control function.
Note
• The INIT command on a TSX PCM 27 or 37 is always operational.
• The FORMAT and RUN commands are only operational when the MAIN MENU is displayed
during operation.
• The STOP command is only operational if the application is in RUN and the TENFT task is active.
C
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/4
______________________________________________________
Utilities
Section 2
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.1
Introduction
2/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
Selecting a new machine
2/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
Clearing an application
2/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.4
Adding options
2/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.5
Saving/retrieving an application
2/5
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.6
Application documentation
2/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.6-1 Creating the dossier
2/7
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.6-2 Printing the documentation
2/12
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.6-3 Description of the locally printed dossier
2/14
_______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.7
Checking coherence
2/16
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.8
Deleting files
2/16
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
2/16
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
C
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Utilities are used to access all functions of the PL7-MMI 37 software :
• Selecting a new target machine
• Clearing an application and its backup
• Adding options
• Saving and retrieving an application to/from a diskette
• Application documentation
• Checking coherence
C
These functions are accessed from the Utilities pulldown menu on the main PL7-MMI 37
screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Utilities
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.2 Selecting a new machine
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Selection
Accesses the target machine selection screen in order to define the
general characteristics of the new module (number, physical address,
etc.). See section - Accessing PL7-MMI 37 software (see General
contents).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.3
Clearing an application
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Reinitialize
This is used to clear an application from the target machine being
used, and also the backup saved in the ...\BACKUP directory.
A dialog box is used to confirm this operation :
• Yes : Application cleared.
• No : Cancels the clearing process.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/3
C
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.4 Adding options
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Add option
This is used to add one or more optional tasks to an application, such
as on-line Help.
C
Available options
This window displays the list of optional tasks available (previously
installed). When one or more tasks has been selected, it appears in
reverse video.
OK
This adds the selected options to the current application. These new
tasks then appear on the configuration manager screen menu.
Cancel
Aborts the current function. No modifications are made to the
application configuration.
Help
Displays the help screen for the Add options screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/4
Utilities
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.5 Saving/retrieving an application
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Save
This is used to save an application to a storage medium.
Restore
This is used to retrieve an application previously saved to a storage
medium.
In both cases, the following dialog box is displayed. The save
directory path must be entered, and if it does not already exist, it is
created automatically.
C
OK
This starts saving (or retrieving) the application to (or from) the
selected storage medium. Saving or retrieving an application may
require several diskettes.
Cancel
Aborts saving/retrieving the application. A message is displayed on
the screen.
Help
Displays the help screen for the Save or Retrieve function.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.6 Application documentation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Documentation
This is used to create and print a structured dossier of the application.
The sections to be printed are chosen. The title page and a footer,
which is printed on all pages, are created.
To do this the following screen is displayed :
C
Create
Used to specify the contents of the dossier and to enter the title page
and footer.
Print
Used to print the dossier, previously specified, either locally on a
printer or to send it to the Station where it can be printed by the
XTEL-DOC tool.
File
Used to delete all the files in the application documentation.
Exit
Quits the Documentation function.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/6
Utilities
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.6-1 Creating the dossier
Sections...
This is used to select the sections which will make up the documentation
dossier to be printed.
Select the sections to create
This window is used to define the contents of the documentation :
ALL TASKS (the whole list is selected),
CROSS REFERENCE,
ANIMATION SCREEN (graphics task). All the animation screens are
selected
CM (all the CM tasks are selected),
TSX COMMUNICATION (communication task),
MATH AND LOGIC (calculation task),
ALARM (alarm supervisor),
TIMER (event and interval timer task),
OPTIONS (all the configured optional tasks are selected).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/7
C
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Characters
This is used to define characters used for building tables : dashed
lines (ASCII) or continuous lines (IBM Semi-Graphic).
The semi-graphic selection should only be made for a printer which
supports IBM extended characters. To use a POSTCRIPT printer,
select ASCII.
CR necessary for printer
This is used to define whether files to be printed should contain
carriage returns : Carriage return (yes) or if the printer generates them
automatically (no).
C
OK
Confirms the selections and starts to create the dossier. This can be
stopped by the Cancel key, in the DOCUMENT BEING CREATED
dialog box.
Cancel
Aborts the Create documentation function.
Help
Displays the help screen for the Create documentation function.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/8
Utilities
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Title page
This is used to enter the title page for the documentation dossier. This
page acts as a header for the dossier and is used to enter general
information relating to the application.
C
Title
Title of the application (64 characters max.).
Company
Company names (16 characters max.) : Designer, User and
Maintenance.
Department
Names of departments or services (16 characters max.) : Designer,
User and Maintenance.
Manager
Names of managers (16 characters max.) : Designer, User and
Maintenance.
REV
Revision number of dossier (3 characters max).
DATE
Revision date of dossier (8 characters max.).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/9
_______________________________________________________________________________________
REVISION
Descriptive comment (32 characters max.) about the revision made.
DESIGNER
Designer's name (12 characters max.).
EXECUTED BY
Name of person in charge of revision (12 characters max.).
OK
Exits the title page and confirms the entries made. The title page
entered or modified is saved, after confirmation, to the
...\MMI\DOP_i\DOC\MMI.TIT file.
C
Cancel
Exits the title page screen without registering the modifications made.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/10
2
Utilities
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Footer
This is used to customize the footer which is printed on each page of
the dossier.
C
TOP OF FOOTER
This is used to enter the contents of the TOP OF FOOTER field (25
characters max.).
Rev
This is used to enter the revision number (version) of the dossier.
BOTTOM OF FOOTER
This is used to enter the contents of the BOTTOM OF FOOTER field
(45 characters max.).
OK
Exits the footer screen and confirms the entries made. The footer
which is entered or modified is saved, after confirmation, to the
...\MMI\DOP_i\DOC\MMI.CRT file.
Cancel
Exits the title page screen without registering the modifications made.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/11
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.6-2 Printing the documentation
Local printing
Displays a dialog box used to select the sections to print locally. Only
the sections which have been created can be printed.
C
Select sections to print
This window is used to select the sections to be printed :
ALL THE TASKS (the whole list is selected), the sections
which can be printed are the "Cross references", the
"Animated displays" (defined in ANT) and the "tasks"
which constitute the operator dialogue application,
ANIMATED DISPLAYS (all the animated displays),
CM (all CM tasks are selected),
OPTIONS (all the configured optional tasks).
Note
On certain POSTCRIPT printers, the screens are printed twice.
Print cover page and summary
If this box is crossed, the cover page and the contents will be printed
with the selected sections.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/12
2
Utilities
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Print
Starts printing the selected sections. Printing can be stopped at any
time with the Cancel button in the DOCUMENT BEING PRINTED
dialog box.
Cancel
Aborts the Print documentation function.
Help
Displays the help screen for Local documentation.
Note
Printing is launched on the LPT1 port. The print manager associated with the connected printer
must be configured in the OS/2 Control Panel. The following choices are preset : driver = IBMNUL,
automatic page jump = NONE and device = LPT1. PL7-MMI 37 offers a list of printers to choose
from, thus enabling a printing function suitable for the graphics to be selected.
Station documentation
Displays a dialog box used to select sections to send to the Station to
be printed by the XTEL-DOC tool. This dialog box is the same as the
one for local printing.
Select the sections to print
This window is used to select sections to send to the station (see local
printing).
OK
Starts preparation of the sections and transmission of the documentation
to the station.
Cancel
Aborts the Print documentation function.
Help
Displays the help screen for the Station documentation function.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/13
C
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.6-3 Description of the locally printed dossier
The composition of the complete listing for an application is as follows :
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-
Title page
Application version
Summary
Cross references
Animation screens
COMMUNICATION task
MATH AND LOGIC task
ALARM supervisor
EVENT AND INTERVAL TIMER task
Optional tasks
Description of a page in the dossier
Each A4 page in the dossier consists of :
• Relevant information,
• The footer at the bottom of the page, which specifies :
1 Application name
2 Designation of the printed heading
3 Customization of the footer (entered in the Documentation function of the Create
menu)
4 Document version number (entered in the Documentation function of the Create
menu)
5 Date of printing
6 Pagination by heading
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/14
Utilities
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Example of a listing page
TSX COMMUNICATION
SYMBOL
ADDRESS
WRITE
PERIOD
HEATSTAT
TEMPCELS
ONOFF
HEAT
INBAM
INITFURN
TEMPFAR
B3
W10
B1
B2
W15
B0
W11
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
0.5
0.5
1
1
C
CROSS-REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
ALACTIVE
A_DAY
A_DOW
A_DOY
A_HOUR
A_MIN
A_MONTH
A_SCRNO1
A_SCRNO2
A_SCRNO3
A_SCRNO4
A_SEC
A_YEAR
INBAM
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
SHUTTIME Number of minutes until shutdown
TASK1
Task 1 status
TASK10
Task 10 status
TASK11
Task 11 status
TASK12
Task 12 status
TASK13
Task 13 status
TASK14
Task 14 status
TASK2
Task 2 status
TASK3
Task 3 status
TASK4
Task 4 status
TASK5
Task 5 status
TASK6
Task 6 status
TASK7
Task 7 status
TASK8
Task 8 status
TASK9
Task 9 status
rev Celsius
date
TEMPCELS Temperature in degrees
REFERENCE CROISEE
19/6 /91
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
A
DESCRIPTION
TASK
number of active alarms
Analog form of day
Analog form of day of week
Analog form of Julian day of year
Analog form of hour
Analog form of minutes
Analog form of month
scr num for graph TASK 1
scr num for graph task 2
scr num for graph task 3
scr num for graph task 4
Analog form of seconds
Analog form of year
Message box
TSX
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
TEMPFAR
Temperature in degrees Farh.
TEMPFARH
UNACKALM
_ASYS030
_ASYS031
_ASYS032
_ASYS033
_ASYS034
_ASYS035
_ASYS036
_ASYS037
Temperature in degrees Farh
Count of unacknowledged alarms
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
DIVERSE
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
BAM
TSXCOM
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
page BAR
4 001IMLTAGS
TSXCOM
NBR
TSXCOM
IMLTAGS
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
rev
CROSS-REFERENCE
FURNACE
W15
W10
W11
date
19/6 /91
page
4 001
TSX
1
2
3
4
5
6
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/15
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.7 Checking coherence
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Coherence
This is used to check coherence between the variables read in the
XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic symbol database by the PLC application
(PL7-3) and those read by the operator dialog application
(PL7-MMI 37). This consists of :
• Checking that all the PL7-MMI 37 mnemonic symbols from the PLC
are associated with the same address in the PLC communication
table and in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic symbol database,
• Checking that all the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic symbols which are
declared as being used by PL7-MMI 37 are actually used by
PL7-MMI 37.
C
At the end of this checking process, a message indicates whether
coherence is correct or not. An error file is created in the event of
errors.
The coherence utility corrects some faults automatically :
• The symbol is associated with address B12 in Tsxcom and with
address B13 in XTEL-SDBASE. This fault is corrected automatically
by modifying the address in Tsxcom so that it is coherent with the
one in XTEL-SDBASE.
• The symbol is referenced in XTEL-SDBASE as having been used in
Tsxcom, but this is not so. This fault is corrected automatically by
modifying the data in the USE field of XTEL-SDBASE.
• The symbol is associated with the same address in Tsxcom and in
XTEL-SDBASE, but the USE field in XTEL-SDBASE does not
indicate this. This fault is corrected automatically by modifying the
data in the USE field of XTEL-SDBASE.
• The symbol exists in Tsxcom but not in XTEL-SDBASE. This fault
is not corrected automatically, but it is written to the error file and is
indicated on the screen.
Note
In the errors file, errors corrected automatically are indicated by the
letter W and uncorrected errors by the letter E.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.8
Delete files
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This is used to delete all the documentation files concerning the current application.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/16
______________________________________________________
Contents part D
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
Configuring the EVENT AND INTERVAL TIMER task
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
1.2
1.3
Introduction
Interval timer configuration table
Event timer configuration table
D
___________________________________________________________________________
D/1
___________________________________________________________________________
D
___________________________________________________________________________
D/2
______________________________________________________
Configuring the EVENT
AND INTERVAL TIMER task
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Introduction
1/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Interval timer configuration table
1/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.3
Event timer configuration table
1/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/8
D
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The EVENT AND INTERVAL TIMER task handles all the events which are used to check
the application during the execution of tasks, in chronological order. This task operates
in real time because all chronological events are synchronized with the system clock.
Two types of chronological events are handled :
• Events which occur periodically. These are configured by the interval timers
configuration table,
• Events which occur at fixed times and dates. These are configured by the event
timers configuration table.
Whichever table is displayed, the user has access to a number of commands via the
command band or the keyboard keys :
<Tab> and <Shift><Tab>
Used to move horizontally between all the fields of a table.
<↓><↑><
D
>< >
Used to move vertically within the current field of a table.
<←>
Used to clear the contents of the selected field.
<Alt> <Q>
If several selections are possible in the current field, this command
displays a dialog box which lists the possible selections. <Esc>
removes the dialog box.
Edit
This menu is used in some cases to perform operations on lines in the
table :
• Insert : Inserts a line into the table.
• Delete : Deletes the current line.
• Copy : Used to copy one or more lines of the table to a buffer
register. To do this :
- Copy : Defines the start of the zone to be copied, by the position
of the cursor.
- < ↓ > < ↑ > : Define the block to be copied.
- Copy : Saves the block to a buffer register.
• Cut : Used to transfer one or more lines of the table to a buffer
register. This command uses the same procedure as the Copy
command.
• Paste : Retrieves the contents of the buffer register previously
saved by the Copy or Cut command.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Configuring the EVENT AND
INTERVAL TIMER task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
View
This menu is used to search for a variable in the list :
• Menu : Brings the sub-window displaying the list of configuration
tables to the foreground.
• Objects... : Displays the list of variables in the database.
• X-ref... : Displays cross-references for variables in the database.
• Search : Used to search for a string of characters in the field
indicated by the cursor.
• Next : Restarts the search for the string previously defined by
Search.
• Start database : positions the cursor on the first element in the table,
• End database : positions the cursor on the last element in the table.
Utilities
Used to associate a report file with the table displayed :
• Report : Associates an xxx.TXT file with the table displayed.
• Export : Associates an xxx.EXP file with the table displayed.
This file may be imported from another application or created using
a text editor.
• Import : Used to import a file created by the Export function in
another application.
Exit
This menu is used to exit from the table displayed :
• Exit : The table is no longer displayed.
• Resume : The table remains displayed.
Enter
Confirms operations performed (e.g. modification to the contents of
a field). If a new variable has been entered, a dialog box is displayed
to define its type (refer to part A, section 3.13).
Cancel
Cancels operations performed.
Exit
Exits the table displayed.
Help
Accesses on-line help for the table :
• Extended help...
F1
• Help with the Field...
Alt-F
• Help with Errors...
Alt-E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
D
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2 Interval timer configuration table
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item TIMERS : Intervals :
D
Tag name
Mnemonic symbol (16 characters max.) for the variable assigned to
the event (e.g. SECOND1). This database variable changes state
(forced to 0) to indicate that the event has "occurred". In the table
above, given as an example, the event MINUT1 occurs every minute
(synchronized against the system internal clock). Its variable value is
then forced to 0, and returns to 1 when the other tasks have detected
the event. (By default, the variable has the value 1 between 2 events.)
Value of
the variable
1
0
time (seconds)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Characters which may be used are defined in part A, section 3.13.
This variable is a binary type (DIGITAL).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Configuring the EVENT AND
INTERVAL TIMER task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Hour/Mins/Secs
These 3 fields are used to define the time interval at which the event
occurs. It is not necessary to fill in all the fields. A field may be given
a value or remain blank (by default, this value is then 0). Values
allowed are as follows :
• For the hours : 0 to 23
• For the minutes : 0 to 59
• For the seconds : 0 to 59
Note
If no parameter is configured (hour, minute or second), the interval timer changes state each
time the event and interval timer task is executed. This may be useful for carrying out operations
more often than once a second.
D
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.3 Event timer configuration table
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item TIMERS : Events :
D
Tag name
Mnemonic symbol (16 characters max.) for variable assigned to the
event (e.g. MIDDAY). This database variable changes state to
indicate that the event has "occurred". In the table above, given as an
example, the event MIDDAY occurs at midday (synchronized with the
internal system clock). The value of its variable is then forced to 1 and
stays at that value until midnight, when it returns to 0.
Value of
the variable
1
0
0
12
time (hours)
0 (midnight)
Characters which may be used are defined in part A, section 3.13.
This variable is a binary type (DIGITAL).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Configuring the EVENT AND
INTERVAL TIMER task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Month/Day/DOW (day of the week)
These 3 fields are used to define a date in the year on which an event
is to take place. When an event takes place the variable takes on the
value 1 and stays at that value until midnight when it returns to 0. It is
not necessary to fill in all the fields :
• If only the Month field is filled in (e.g. JAN), the event will take place
every day during January
• If only the Day field is filled in (e.g. 10), the event will take place on
the 10th of each month
• If the fields Month and Day are filled in (e.g. 1 JAN), the event will
only take place on the 1st January
• If only the field DOW is filled in (e.g. FRI), The event will take place
every Friday, whatever the month
• If the fields Month and DOW are filled in (e.g. JAN and MON), the
event will take place every Monday in January.
The allowed values are :
• For Month : 1 to 12 or the first 3 letters of the month (e.g. JAN, FEB,
etc.)
• For Day : 1 to 31
• For DOW : First 3 letters of the day (e.g. MON, TUE, WED, etc.)
Hour/Mins/Secs
These 3 fields are used to define a time (hour, minute, second) in the
day on which the event is to take place. When the event takes place,
the variable takes on the value 1 and stays at that value until midnight
when it returns to 0. It is not necessary to fill in all the fields. If a field
is blank its value is 0 by default.
• If only these 3 fields are filled in, the event takes place every day, at
the specified time.
• If the fields indicating the date are also filled in, the event takes place
at the specified time on the date indicated (see description given
above).
The allowed values are :
• For the hours : 0 to 23
• For the minutes : 0 to 59
• For the seconds : 0 to 59
Note
No coherency check is made for month/day. It is possible, for
example, to enter 30 February in which case the event timer will
never activate.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/7
D
_______________________________________________________________________________________
List of abbreviations used for the tables
D
Days of the week
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
SUN
Months
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
The Timer task can be placed in the foreground. It then displays the following screen
in order to update the PLC clock and the local clock of the target machine.
16 : 33 : 34
Timer
Mer 27 / 07 / 1994
F3 : Retour tache appelante
F6 : Valider date et heure
MM
DD
YY
HH
MM
SS
7
27
94
16
32
35
Selection : fleches DROITE et GAUCHE, Modification : fleches HAUT et BAS
Copyright (C) Telemecanique 1993 / 1994, tous droits reserves .
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/8
______________________________________________________
Contents part E
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Introduction
Configuration table for groups of alarms
Alarm definition table
Configuration table for controlling alarms
Configuration table of alarm screen control
Configuration table for displaying alarms
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
Executing the ALARM SUPERVISOR in the foreground
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
2/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.1
2.2
General
List of alarms screen
E
___________________________________________________________________________
E/1
___________________________________________________________________________
E
___________________________________________________________________________
E/2
______________________________________________________
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Introduction
1/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Configuration table for groups of alarms
1/4
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.3
Alarm definition table
1/7
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.4
Configuration table for controlling alarms
1/13
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.4-1 Alarm control screen
1/13
1.4-2 Key band configuration screen
1/14
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.5
Configuration table for alarm screen control
1/15
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.6
Configuration table for displaying alarms
1/18
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/18
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
During operation, the alarm supervisor checks the alarm conditions defined by the
configuration tables in this section in order to inform the operator of any faults in the
process being monitored. The following services are provided :
• Priority level management (0 to 99).
• Masking of some alarms, at the discretion of the operator.
• Simultaneous display of 14 alarm messages out of a possible 100.
• Acknowledgment of an alarm or a group of alarms.
• Displaying the alarms in groups (10 max.).
• Displaying dynamic messages (variables included in a text).
• Creation of a "stream" of messages to the printer, which the operator can inhibit.
• Ability to call-up certain tasks from the list of alarms screen (preceding task, on-line
help, task adjustment or management).
Whatever configuration table is displayed, the user has access to a certain number of
commands via the command band or the keyboard :
<Tab> and <Shift><Tab>
Used to move horizontally between all the fields of the table.
<↓><↑><
E
>< >
Used to move vertically within the current field of the table.
<←>
Used to clear the contents of the selected field.
<Alt> <Q>
If several selections are possible in the current field, this command
displays a dialog box listing the selections possible. <Esc> removes
the dialog box.
Edit
This menu is used in certain cases to perform operations on the lines
of a table :
• Insert : Inserts a line in the table.
• Delete : Deletes the current line.
• Copy : Used to copy one or more lines of the table to a buffer
register. To do this :
- Copy : Defines the start of the zone to be copied by the position of
the cursor.
- < ↓ > < ↑ > : Define the block to be copied.
- Copy : Saves the block to a buffer register.
• Cut : Used to transfer one or more lines of the table to a buffer
register. This command uses the same procedure as the Copy
command.
• Paste : Retrieves the contents of the buffer register, previously
saved by the Copy or Cut command.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
View
This menu is used to search for a variable in the list :
• Menu : Brings the sub-menu which displays the list of configuration
tables to the foreground.
• Next screen : Places the next screen in the foreground.
• Previous screen : Places the previous screen in the foreground.
• Objects... : Displays the list of variables in the database.
• X-ref... : Displays the cross-references for the variables in the
database.
• Search : Used to search for a string of characters in the field
indicated by the cursor.
• Next : Restarts the search for the string previously defined by
Search.
• Start database : Positions the cursor on the first element in the
table.
• End database : Positions the cursor on the last element in the table.
Utilities
Used to associate a report file with the table displayed :
• Report : Associates an xxx.TXT file with the table displayed.
• Export : Associates an xxx.EXP file with the table displayed.
This file may be imported from another application or created using
a text editor.
• Import : This is used to import a file created by the Export function
in another application.
Exit
This menu is used to exit the table displayed :
• Exit : The table is no longer displayed.
• Restart : The table remains displayed.
OK
Confirms the operations performed (e.g. modifying the contents of a
field). If a new variable has been entered, a dialog box is displayed to
define its type (refer to divider A, section 3.13).
Cancel
Cancels operations selected but not confirmed.
Exit
Exits the table displayed.
Next
Places the next screen in the foreground.
Previous
Places the previous screen in the foreground.
Help
Accesses the on-line help for the table :
• Extended help...
F1
• Help with the Field...
Alt-F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2 Configuration table for groups of alarms
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item ALARMS : Groups. It is used to group the alarms to make them easier to
understand during operation. Moreover, specific display attributes may be assigned to
each group of alarms.
E
Group name
Mnemonic symbol (8 characters max.) for the group of alarms. It is
possible to define up to 10 groups of alarms. Classification of
alarms by groups is normally performed according to certain common
points : starting with type of device, degree of seriousness, external
conditions which can activate these alarms, etc.
Precision
Defines the precision (number of digits after the decimal point) for
floating point values displayed in alarm messages. For this field to be
active, the variable must be of FLOAT type with no % specified in the
Message field. This field may take a value from 0 to 9 (2 by default).
Initial F. Clr
Defines the color of the characters for alarm messages when a fault
occurs. The following colors are allowed :
RED
BLU
WHI
GRN
Red
Blue
White
Green
BLK
MAG
CYN
YEL
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Initial B. Clr
Defines the background color for alarm messages in the group when
a fault occurs. The following colors are allowed :
RED
BLU
WHI
GRN
Red
Blue
White
Green
BLK
MAG
CYN
MAR
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Maroon
Initial blink
Defines a blinking attribute for displaying the alarms in the group :
YES
Display blinks.
NO
Display does not blink.
Ack.
Defines whether alarms in the group must be acknowledged or not by
an operator :
YES
Alarms to be acknowledged
NO
No acknowledgment required.
When alarms have to be acknowledged, the alarm message remains
on the screen even when the alarm condition has disappeared.
Otherwise, the alarm message disappears when the alarm condition
is no longer true.
Aud.
Defines whether the alarms in a group have to activate an "Audio" bit.
This Ixy,F bit in the communication module may be used, for example,
to activate a hooter.
YES
"Audio" bit activated,
NO
Bit not used.
Ack. F. Clr
Defines the color the characters in the group alarm messages take on
when this alarm is acknowledged by an operator and is still present.
The allowed colors are the same as those defined for the Initial F. Clr
field.
Ack. B. Clr
Defines the color which the background to a group alarm message
takes on, when this alarm is acknowledged by an operator and is still
present. The allowed colors are the same as those defined for the
Initial B. Clr field.
Ack. blink
Defines a blinking attribute for displaying group alarms which are
acknowledged and still present :
YES
Display blinks.
NO
Display does not blink.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/5
E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Non-ack F. Clr
Defines the color which the characters in a group alarm message take
on when the alarm disappears, although it has not yet been
acknowledged. The allowed colors are the same as those for the
Initial F. Clr field.
Non-ack B. Clr Defines the color which the background to a group alarm message
takes on when the alarm disappears, although it has not yet been
acknowledged. The allowed colors are the same as those for the
Initial B. Clr field.
Non-ack blink
Defines a blinking attribute for the display of group alarms which have
disappeared without being acknowledged :
YES
Display blinks.
NO
Display does not blink.
Print
Defines whether a group alarm message must be printed "as and
when" a fault occurs:
YES
Message printed.
NO
Message not printed.
The default parameters of the COM1 serial port on the communication
module are : 2400 bps, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit.
Archive
E
This field cannot be written to and its value is always NO.
Note
When an alarm message is printed, a status attribute appears on the listing, and text is displayed
on the screen (this information is shown on the screen in the same color as the characters of the
alarm message) :
• APP for appearance of the alarm,
• DIS for disappearance of the alarm. If this attribute is preceded by an asterisk, this indicates that
the alarm has disappeared without being acknowledged,
• ACQ to acknowledge the alarm.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/6
1
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.3 Alarm definition table
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item ALARMS : Define. It is used to specify elements in the database whose value
determines the appearance of an alarm.
Note
The alarm groups must be defined before defining the alarms.
E
Tag Name
Mnemonic symbol (16 characters max.) of the variable in the database
which identifies the alarm. A change in the value of this variable
(according to conditions defined by the user) determines appearance
of the alarm.
If the variable is an analog, binary, floating point or message type it
belongs to the real-time database of the communication module.
When it is a PL7 type, it is read from and written to the PLC and in this
case PLC addresses are not allowed.
Entering a PL7 type symbol requires that it has been previously
defined in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic symbol database.
The permitted characters are described in divider A section 3.13
Group
Defines the group to which the alarm defined by the variable belongs.
This group name must also be defined in the configuration table for
groups of alarms, but this is not checked automatically.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/7
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Priority
This number, from 1 to 99, defines the priority of the alarms so as to
arrange them in order of display. The higher the priority, the lower the
number which is entered.
Mask
This option is used to mask the alarm.
YES
The alarm is not registered.
NO
The alarm is registered.
This option is only valid if the system variable ALOGMASK equals 1.
If ALOGMASK = 0 the alarm remains registered.
Cond.
Defines the condition which will activate the alarm :
• ON : An alarm is activated when the value of the variable (binary
type) is equal to 1.
• OFF : An alarm is activated when the value of the variable (binary
type) is equal to 0.
• TGL : An alarm is activated each time the variable changes state
(binary type), changing from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0.
• GT or > : An alarm is activated each time the variable (analog or
floating point type) is greater than the value fixed by the Limit field.
• LT or < : An alarm is activated each time the variable (analog or
floating point type) is lower than the value fixed by the Limit field.
• GE or ≥ : An alarm is activated each time the variable (analog or
floating point type) is greater than or equal to the value fixed by the
Limit field.
• LE or ≤ : An alarm is activated each time the variable (analog or
floating point type) is less than or equal to the value fixed by the Limit
field.
E
• EQ or = : An alarm is activated each time the variable (analog or
floating point type) is equal to the value fixed by the Limit field.
Limit
Defines a reference value for activating an alarm, for analog or
floating point type variables. This value may be analog or floating
point.
Note
ALOGMASK is a system variable and is therefore preset (refer to divider H section 2.2). It is set to
1 when the application starts and is used to mask or unmask all the alarms for which the Mask option
is defined as YES.
As all the application variables are set to 0 when the application starts, it may be helpful to mask
all the alarms generated during an OFF condition. To ensure that these are subsequently
registered, merely set ALOGMASK to 0 :
• either in manual mode, via a function key defined using ANT,
• or in automatic mode, using an event defined in the Math and Logic task.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/8
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Deadband
This field is only used for analog or floating point type variables. It is
used with the Limit field to define a tolerance on maintaining the alarm.
The following examples illustrate the different conditions for activating
an alarm (analog or floating point type) :
Condition < (less than)
1) The alarm is activated immediately the variable has a value less
than that specified by the limit.
2) The alarm remains active until this value becomes greater than or
equal to the limit plus the tolerance (dead band).
Condition ≤ (less than or equal to)
1) The alarm is activated when the variable has a value less than or
equal to that specified by the limit.
2) The alarm remains active until this value becomes greater than
the limit plus the tolerance (dead band).
Condition > (greater than)
1) The alarm is activated immediately the value of the variable is
greater than that specified by the limit.
2) The alarm remains active until this value is less than or equal to
the limit minus the tolerance (dead band).
Condition ≥ (greater than or equal to)
1) The alarm is activated when the variable has a value greater than
or equal to that specified by the limit.
2) The alarm remains active until this value is less than the limit
minus the tolerance (dead band).
Status var
Condition = (equal to)
1) The alarm is activated when the value is equal to that specified by
the limit.
2) The alarm remains active until the difference (in absolute terms)
between this value and the limit exceeds the tolerance (dead
band).
Mnemonic symbol of an analog type variable in the database, which
indicates the status of the alarm. The alarm supervisor writes the
value of this variable, but it can be read by all the other tasks. This
variable is updated each time the alarm changes status. It may have
the following values :
• 0. The alarm is inactive.
• 1. The alarm has been activated and has returned to the inactive
state without having been acknowledged. This value can only
appear if YES has been entered in the Ack. field in the group of
alarms table.
• 2. The alarm is active and has been acknowledged.
• 3. The alarm is active and has not been acknowledged. This value
can only appear if YES has been entered in the Ack. field in the group
of alarms table.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/9
E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Message
The message which is displayed to the operator when an alarm
occurs. The entry field is limited to 44 characters, including the %
characters if there are any. When these characters are used, the first
specification corresponds to Tag 1, the second to Tag 2 and the third
to Tag 3. During operation, the message is truncated after the 43rd
character whatever the size of the message. It can contain values of
variables in the database, which are displayed according to the %
instructions when they are present.
In general, the % directives are as follows :
%[-]{Nbre][•prec]<type>
enables the text to be set to the left
Nbre
defines the minimum number of characters
•prec
defines precision (number of decimal places)
type
the following types can be used
• %c for a character (8 bits)
• %s for a MESSAGE type string of characters
• %d for a signed decimal integer
• %u for an unsigned decimal integer
• %o for an unsigned byte integer
• %x for an unsigned hexadecimal integer, using the characters a-f
• %X for an unsigned hexadecimal integer, using the characters A-F
• %f for a floating point value.
Eg.
Display a PLC word : %d
Display a double PLC word : %•0f
Display a PLC floating point value to 3 decimal places : %•3f
E
If this field is not specified, the message associated with the symbol
in the XTEL-SDBASE will be displayed when the alarm is created.
Tag 1
Mnemonic symbol for a variable which defines the first value in the
alarm message.
Tag 2
Mnemonic symbol for a variable which defines the second value in the
alarm message.
Tag 3
Mnemonic symbol which defines the third value in the alarm message.
OFB
Defines whether the alarm is created by an OFB (YES or NO). This
field is filled in automatically by the system.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/10
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The Utilities menu, via the Automatic configuration sub-menu, offers a facility for
filling in the table of alarms. The following window is displayed :
CONFIGURATION AUTOMATIQUE D'ALARMES
Alarmes sur bits 'ERROR' d'OFB DIAG
Alarmes sur Symboles
Def*
Groupes :
0.5
1
2
10
30
Validation
Groups
Annulation
Aide
Maj messages
This is used to select the group to which the automatically created
alarms will belong.
Alarms on OFB DIAG error bits
This is used to automatically configure alarms on all the OFB DIAG
error bits defined, such as those in SDBASE. The alarms will be
configured with condition "ON" and priority 1. The symbols are
automatically added to the communication table in the interval selected.
Alarms on Symbols
This is used to configure alarms on all the symbols corresponding to
the mask indicated. The condition is "ON" for the digital variables, and
> 0 for the analog variables. The associated alarm message is the
SDBASE comment.
Update - messages
This updates the "Message" field of the whole alarm table, according
to the comment found in Sdbase.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/11
E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Example
In operation, when the alarm is activated, the following message is displayed :
temperature = xxx; pressure = yyy. The value xxx being supplied by the variable
VTEMP and the value yyy by the variable VPRES.
Note
E
When the variables (Tag 1, Tag 2, etc.) are defined as parameters but are not referenced, (for
example by % in the message), only the value of Tag 1 will be displayed at the end of the message.
Tags 2 and 3 are ignored.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/12
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.4 Configuration table for controlling alarms
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item ALARMS : Control. It comprises two screens :
• Alarms control screen,
• Key band configuration screen
______________________________________________________________________
1.4-1 Alarms control screen
E
Screen color
This field is used to define the background color of the alarm screen
displayed when the tasks are executed (during operation). The
following list indicates the 3 characters to enter according to the
background color obtained :
RED
BLU
WHI
GRN
Banner Tag
Red
Blue
White
Green
BLK
MAG
CYN
YEL
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
This field is used to define the mnemonic symbol (16 characters
max.) of a variable message in the database, whose contents will be
automatically displayed in the alarm band (banner). Characters
which are permitted are defined in divider A, section 3.13.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/13
• Help with an Error...
Alt-E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Rem. Ack. tag
This field is used to define the mnemonic symbol (16 characters max.)
of a binary variable in the database, which allows remote
acknowledgment of alarms. Acknowledgment is performed when the
value of this variable changes state.
Note
Only one line may be defined in this configuration table.
_______________________________________________________________________
1.4-2 Key band configuration screen
This screen is used to define the default state of the selections which can be accessed
using the <F2> to <F5> keys in the alarms list screen.
E
Visible groups
This field is used to define the alarm group, whose alarms will be
displayed by default by the alarms list screen: ALL defines all the
alarm groups. This selection can be modified while running using the
<F2> key on the alarms list screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/14
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Sort by
This field is used to define the default sort option, for the display of
alarms :
TIME : the alarms will be displayed in chronological order,
PRIORITY : the alarms will be displayed in order of priority.
This selection can be modified while running using the <F3> key on
the alarms list screen.
Banner
This field is used to define the alarm which will be displayed by default
in the alarm band :
FUNACK : first alarm not acknowledged within the groups,
SELECT : is used to select an alarm to act as entry point for the online Help or Diagnostic task,
HIGH : alarm with highest priority within the groups,
FIRST : first alarm activated within the groups,
LAST : last alarm activated within the groups,
GHIGH : alarm with highest priority within the selected group,
GFIRST : first alarm activated within the selected group,
GLAST : last alarm activated within the selected group.
This selection can be modified while running using the <F4> key on
the alarms list screen.
Print
This field is used to define the default print option :
OFF : print function is invalid,
ON : print function is valid.
E
This selection can be modified while running using the <F5> key on
the alarms list screen.
Ack CPU variable
This field is used to define a binary or PL7 variable which will be set
to 1 when an alarm is acknowledged (F9 key).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/15
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.5
Configuration table for alarm screen control
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item ALARMS : Screen control. It is used to connect the function keys or the database
variables to the actions of the alarm task.
Tag
E
Mnemonic symbol of a binary type variable in the database, which is
to be associated with an action defined in the Action field. The
corresponding action is executed each time the variable changes to
state 1.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/16
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Key
This field is used to define a key on the keyboard to be associated with
the action defined in the Action field. Each time this key is activated
by the operator, the action is executed.
Keys which may be entered in this field, and thus associated with an
action, are the following :
Entry
ESC
TAB
HME
UP
PUP
LFT
RGT
END
DWN
PDN
INS
DEL
F1 to F12
S1 to S12
Action
Key
<Esc>
Escape
<Tab>
< >
Home
<↑>
Up arrow
< >
Preceding page
<←>
Left arrow
<→>
Right arrow
<End> or < ↓ >
<↓>
Down arrow
< >
Next page
<Inser>
Insert
<Del>
Delete
<F1> to <F12> function keys
<Shift> + <F1> to <F12>
This is used to define the action associated with the function key or
the variable :
• HELP starts to execute the on-line Help task.
• GROUP selects a group of alarms (to save or acknowledge).
• SORT selects a sort option to display.
• BANNER selects one of the alarms to display in the alarm band.
• PRINT confirms or stops printing.
• DIAG starts execution of the DIAG task.
• GRAPH starts execution of the graphics task.
• RUNMGR starts execution of the Run-time manager.
• ACK acknowledges an alarm.
• CLEAR clears an error message.
• SUP scrolls the screen one line upwards.
• SDN scrolls the screen one line downwards.
• PGUP displays the preceding page.
• PGDN displays the next page.
• GRPACK acknowledges all the non-acknowledged alarms in the
selected group.
• RETURN executes a command.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/17
E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.6 Configuration table for displaying alarms
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item ALARMS : Display. This is used to define variables in the database as targets so
that the messages created by the alarm screen may be used by other tasks (e.g. the
graphics task). This table is therefore optional, but it may be used to define a customized
alarm display.
E
Field
This indicates the mnemonic symbol name of the display line on the
alarm screen which is to be copied to the associated variables (var.
messa, color F, color B). Possible names are :
DATE for information about the date.
TIME for information about the time.
GROUPSEL for the group selected.
SORTSEL for current sort option.
BANRSEL for current alarm band option.
PRINTSEL for printing status.
BANNER for the alarm band line.
L1 to L14 for the alarm lines, L1 indicating the first line and L14 the last.
Message Tag
Mnemonic symbol of the message variable to which the contents of
the associated field is to be copied.
F. Clr tag
Mnemonic symbol for the analog or PL7 variable to which the
foreground color of the associated field is to be copied (color of the
characters).
B. Clr. tag
Mnemonic symbol of the analog or PL7 variable to which the
background color of the associated field is to be copied (background
color).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/18
______________________________________________________
Executing ALARM SUPERVISOR
in the foreground
Section 2
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.1
General
2/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
List of alarms screen
2/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
2/4
E
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1 General
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The foreground task, declared with the attribute F during system configuration under
PL7-MMI 37, is displayed when the application starts to be executed :
• On powering up the communication module with a cartridge containing an application,
• When starting to execute the application from the permanent user services main menu
(F8 key).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
List of alarms screen
_______________________________________________________________________________________
When the ALOG alarm supervisor is executed in the foreground, the following "List of
alarms" screen is displayed :
00:14:38
Alarm Logger
Tue 01/01/1980
*** Start of alarm list ***
**** End of alarm list ****
E
*F1
Help
ALL
*F2
Group
TIME
*F3
Sort
FUNACK
*F4
Bann
ON
*F5
Print
*F6
Diag
*F7
Graph
*F8
Runmgr
*F9
Ack
*F10
Clear
This screen is divided into 3 sections :
• The alarm band in the upper section
• The summarized list of alarms
• The list of function keys available to the user
During operation, only the actions assigned to the F1 to F10 and S1 to S10 keys will be
shown on-screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/2
Executing the ALARM SUPERVISOR in the foreground
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Alarm band
Depending on the user's choice, this displays, for all groups or for the selected group,
the first active alarm, the last active alarm, the alarm with the highest priority or the first
non-acknowledged alarm.
The data provided is the time the alarm appeared, D if the alarm was created by an OFB,
* if the alarm must be acknowledged, the mnemonic symbol of the variable which
identified the alarm, the message associated with the alarm and the total number of
active alarms at that moment (max. of 100).
Summarized list of alarms
This gives the list of alarms, either chronologically or in order of priority, for the selected
group. The data displayed for each alarm is the date and time of appearance, D for
alarms created by an OFB, * for alarms which must be acknowledged, the name of the
variable which identified the alarm and the message defined by PL7-MMI 37 and
associated with the alarm.
The list of alarms can display 14 alarms simultaneously. To list all the alarms, the up,
down, preceding page and next page keys on the keyboard or the corresponding
function keys defined by PL7-MMI 37 (on a display terminal) have to be used.
List of function keys
This list is defined by the PL7-MMI 37 alarm screen check table. The following list is
provided by default :
Help
Starts execution of the on-line Help task for the selected alarm, with
SELECT (see <F4>).
<F2>
Group
This key is pressed repeatedly to select a group of alarms. The name
of the group selected is displayed above the key. By default, all the
alarm groups are selected (ALL).
<F3>
Sort
This is used to select the sort option for displaying the alarms (TIME
by default) :
• TIME The alarms are displayed in chronological order (the first
alarm received is displayed first),
• PRIORITY The alarms are displayed in order of priority (alarms with
lower priority are displayed after alarms with higher priority).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/3
E
_______________________________________________________________________________________
<F4>
Bann
This is used to define the alarm to be displayed in the alarm band
(FUNACK by default) :
• TOP. The alarm with the highest priority from all groups. When this
option is selected, this alarm is displayed in the band whichever
group has been selected.
• FIRST First active alarm from all groups.
• LAST Last active alarm from all groups.
• GTOP The alarm with the highest priority in the selected group.
• GFIRST First active alarm in the selected group.
• GLAS Last active alarm in the selected group.
• FUNACK First non-acknowledged alarm from all groups,
• SELECT Displays a cursor which can be used to select an alarm
before starting the HELP or DIAG task. This alarm acts as the point
of entry to on-line help or diagnostics.
<F5>
Print
Confirms (ON) or cancels (STOP) the printing function. The default
value is ON.
When this function is confirmed, if an alarm appears with a print
attribute (defined by PL7-MMI 37), it is displayed and sent to the
printer. If this function is not confirmed or if the alarm does not have
a print attribute, it is only displayed.
Diag
Starts executing the diagnostic task for the selected alarm, with
SELECT (see <F4>).
E
<F7>
Graph
Displays the current screen for the graphics task.
<F8>
Runmgr
Displays the RUNMGR Run-time manager screen.
<F9>
Ack
This is used to acknowledge the longest-standing non-acknowledged
alarm in the list of alarms. Alarms which require acknowledgment are
displayed with an asterisk (*) in front of their mnemonic symbol. When
an alarm is acknowledged, the asterisk disappears and the alarm
message changes to the acknowledged colors defined by PL7 MMI 37.
The time and date of acknowledgment are indicated on the printer, if
it is being used.
If a variable has been defined in the Ack CPU variable field in the
alarm band configuration screen, it will be set to 1 when the <F9> key
is pressed.
<F10>
Clear
This is used to clear any error or warning messages displayed in the
alarm band.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/4
______________________________________________________
Contents part F
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Introduction
Configuration table for variables
Configuration table for triggers
Procedures file
Declarations
Definition of the procedure
Keywords
F
___________________________________________________________________________
F/1
___________________________________________________________________________
F
___________________________________________________________________________
F/2
______________________________________________________
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Introduction
1/2
_________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1-1 Text editor
1/5
_______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Configuration table for variables
1/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.3
Configuration table for triggers
1/7
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.4
Procedures file
1/8
_________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.5
Declarations
1/10
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.6
Definition of the procedure
1/15
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.7
Keywords
1/38
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/38
F
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The Math and logic task is used to carry out math or logic operations on the elements
in the database. There are also several advantages resulting from structured programming
languages :
• A complete math language, including structuring expressions into blocks or loops and
calling up math functions.
• Emulation of the math coprocessor.
Operations carried out by the Math and logic task are grouped into procedures. A
procedure can be executed :
• following a change in value of a variable in the database,
• following call up by another procedure in the Math and logic task.
Types of data
The Math and logic task is used to process the following types of data :
• Binary (Digital)
• Analog
• Floating point
• Message
This task also allows use of the same types of local variable.
The following rules are applied when converting values between types :
• Any numerical value may be assigned to a binary, analog or floating point type of
variable by the assigning operator (= or ==).
• Assigning an analog or floating point value to a binary variable may involve a loss of
precision.
F
• Assigning a floating point value to an analog variable may also involve a loss of
precision.
• The result of arithmetic operations has the maximum precision of the operators. If one
of the operators is floating point, the result is floating point, otherwise it is analog.
Binary and analog types are processed as 16-bit signed words.
• Execution of an arithmetical operation (e.g. operation on very large floating point
values or division by zero) can cause an overflow.
• A character string type of value can also be used in an arithmetic or logic operation,
provided this string contains a sequence of digits. The string is converted into a
numerical value during the operation (conversion stops at the first character which is
not a digit).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Example 1 :
x is an analog element (16-bit word).
The expression x = 47.1 assigns the value 47 (not 47.1) to x. Since x
is an integer, the decimal part of the floating point value is truncated.
Example 2 :
x is an analog element of value 99 and s is a message type element.
The expression s = "RPT" + x assigns the value "RPT99" to s. x is
converted into a string and then added to the constant string "RPT".
Configuration tables
The Math and logic task uses 3 types of configuration table :
• MATH & LOGIC : Variables, which contain mnemonic symbols of variables in the
database to which the task must have access.
• MATH & LOGIC : Triggers, which contain the list of activators (triggers). Each trigger
may execute one or more procedures in the calculation task.
• MATH & LOGIC : Procedures. There must be a procedure file for each procedure
listed in the triggers configuration table.
When a configuration table of variables or triggers is displayed, the user has access to
some commands using the command band or the keyboard keys :
<Tab> and <Shift><Tab>
Used to move horizontally between all the fields in the table.
<↓><↑><
>< >
Used to move vertically within the current field of the table.
<←>
Used to clear the contents of the selected field.
Edit
This menu is used to carry out some operations on the lines of the
table :
• Insert : Inserts a line into the table.
• Delete : Deletes the current line.
• Copy : Used to copy one or more lines to a buffer register. To do
this :
- Copy : Defines the start of the zone to be copied with the position
of the cursor.
- < ↓ > < ↑ > : Define the block to be copied.
- Copy : Saves the block to a buffer register.
• Cut : Used to transfer one or more lines of the table to a buffer
register. This command uses the same procedure as the Copy
command.
• Paste : Retrieves the contents of the buffer register previously
saved by the Copy or Cut command.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Display
This menu is used to search for a variable in the list :
• Menu : Brings the sub-window menu displaying the list of configuration
tables to the foreground.
• Objects... : Displays the list of variables in the database.
• X-ref... : Displays cross-references for the variables in the database.
• Search : Used to search for a string of characters in the field
highlighted by the cursor.
• Next : Restarts the search for the string previously defined by
Search.
• Start database : positions the cursor on the first element in the table.
• End database : positions the cursor on the last element in the table.
Utilities
This is used to associate a report file with the table displayed :
• Report : Associates an xxx.TXT file with the table displayed.
• Export : Associates an xxx.EXP file with the table displayed. This
file may be imported from another application or created with a text
editor.
• Import : Used to import a file created by the Export file in another
application.
Exit
Used to exit the table displayed :
• Exit : The table is no longer displayed.
• Repeat : The table remains displayed.
F
OK
Confirms the operations performed. If a new variable has been
entered, a dialog box is displayed in order to define its type (refer to
Part A, section 3.13).
Cancel
Cancels the operations performed.
Exit
Exits the table displayed.
Help
Accesses the on-line help for the table :
• Extended Help... F1
• Help on the field... Alt-F
• Help with an error... Alt-E
Note
The Math and logic task (MATHLOG) accepts a procedures volume of up to 64 Kb.
As this is not the size of the edited file, the percentage of occupation of this volume
is shown when the tables are created.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/4
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1-1 Text editor
When the procedures table is displayed, the user has access to the following commands
using the command band or the keyboard keys :
Files
This file is used to operate on the xxx.PRG procedures file :
• Save : Used to save the file.
• OK : This is used to check the syntax of procedures entered. The first
line with a syntax error is highlighted (red on a color screen). The
Alt-E command is used to display a help message relating to the
error detected.
• ClearErr : This is used to delete the highlighting indicating the
syntax error.
Edit
This menu is used to carry out some operations on the lines of the
table :
• Insert : Inserts an entry line in the table.
• Delete : Deletes the line highlighted by the cursor from the table.
• Copy : Used to copy one or more lines of the table to a buffer
register. To do this :
- Copy : Defines the start of the zone to be copied with the position
of the cursor.
- < ↓ > < ↑ > : Define the block to be copied.
- Copy : Saves the block to a buffer register.
• Cut : Used to delete one or more lines of the table and retain them
in a buffer register. This command uses the same procedure as the
Copy command.
• Paste : Retrieves the contents of the buffer register previously
saved by the Copy or Cut command.
• Search : Used to search for a string of characters in the table.
• Reset : When a block has been selected (e.g. to be copied or cut),
this command cancels the selection (pointers at the beginning and
the end of the block).
Exit
This menu is used to exit the table displayed :
• Exit : The table is no longer displayed.
• Restart : The table remains displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/5
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2 Configuration table for variables
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item MATH AND LOGIC : Variables.
Tag name
Mnemonic symbol (16 characters max.) identifies the variable in the
database which is to be used in a procedure. Keywords may not be
used as the name of a variable.
The characters permitted are defined in part A section 3.13.
This variable can be a binary, analog, floating point, message or PL7
type. The PL7 type will be defined in the XTEL-SDBASE mnemonic
symbol database.
Type
F
Summary of the types of variable which have been defined using a
dialog box (see Part A, section 3.13) :
• DIGITAL (binary)
• ANALOG (analog)
• FLOAT (floating point)
• MESSAGE.
Description
This brings up the comment which has been defined using a dialog
box (refer to Part A, section 3.13).
If the variable is a PL7 type, this comment is the one defined under
XTEL-SDBASE.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.3 Configuration table for triggers
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This table is accessed from the Configuration manager menu by double clicking on the
item MATH AND LOGIC : Triggers.
Trigger Tag
Mnemonic symbol (16 characters max.) identifies the variable in the
database which is used as a trigger to initiate execution of a procedure.
The procedure will only be executed when the value of this trigger
changes to state 1 (on rising edge).
Characters accepted are the same as those in the table of variables
(refer to divider A, section 3.13) :
This (trigger) variable is a binary or PL7 type.
Procedure
Name of the procedure which is to be triggered by the variable entered
in the Trigger Tag field.
This name may have up to 8 characters.
In the screen, given as an example above, the procedure TEMPPRES
is executed each time the trigger PROCESS changes to state 1.
To call up a procedure from another file using the CALL proc
command, ensure that :
• the procedure called up is a main procedure
• a trigger is associated with this procedure.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/7
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.4 Procedures file
_______________________________________________________________________________________
This file is accessed from the Configuration manager menu, by double clicking on the
item MATH & LOGIC : Procedures. A dialog box is then displayed to choose the
xxx.PRG file to edit.
F
If the procedure has not yet been created, enter the name of the file (without extension)
and then select Edit. This name is the one which was defined in the Procedure field in
the MATH & LOGIC table : Triggers.
If the procedure has been defined already, select it and then press Edit.
In both cases the following screen appears and is used to display, modify or enter the
procedures.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/8
1
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
_______________________________________________________________________________________
• Enter the procedures (described in the following sections).
• Confirm the syntax with the Confirm command in the File menu (Alt-V).
• Do not forget to backup the file with the Save command in the File menu (Alt-W).
Note
A procedures file must contain a procedure which has the same name as the file (without the
extension) This procedure is called the main procedure of the file. For example, the file
TEMPPRES.PRG must contain the main procedure TEMPPRES.
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/9
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.5 Declarations
_______________________________________________________________________________________
A procedure file contains first declarations of the possible local variables and then a
definition of the procedure (described in section 1.6).
A declaration is used to create a reference :
• To a local variable, the procedure or the Math and logic task.
• To a mnemonic symbol or numerical constant.
• To a character string.
• To another procedure in another file.
The declarations are always located before the procedure definitions and instructions,
as shown in the example below :
'comments
'comments
DECLARE ...
DECLARE ...
'comments
PROC name
BEGIN
DECLARE ...
DECLARE ...
A = A + 1
B = B + 1
DECLARATION
DECLARATION
INSTRUCTION
1
DEFINITION OF
THE PROCEDURE
2
END
Note
Within a procedure, comment lines are not allowed between declarations. However, comments are
allowed on the same line as declarations.
F
Variables in the database
These are declared in the variables configuration table, and are used to make the link
with the application. They are always entered in upper case letters.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/10
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Local variables
These variables are used to save values used during calculations but are not part of the
database. They cannot be used by another task.
Local variables can be declared either inside or outside procedures :
• Local variables declared inside a procedure 2 can only be accessed by this
procedure. Each time the procedure is called up they are reset to zero. When
execution of the procedure has finished, they are deleted.
• Local variables declared outside the procedure 1 can be accessed by all the
procedures in the Math and logic task and retain their value between two procedure
calls. They must be defined in all the procedure files which use them.
A local variable can be declared as a single variable or as a table :
• Single variable :
- format : DECLARE type name
- type :
SHORT, 16-bit signed integer
LONG, 32-bit signed integer
FLOAT, floating point
STRING, ASCII string
- name : max. of 30 characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and _)
- example : DECLARE SHORT s1.
• Table:
- format : DECLARE type name size
- type : same as for a single variable
- name : same as for a single variable, except that the name of a table may not start
with a number (0-9)
- size : a table may have up to 16 dimensions. Each dimension is a constant and must
be entered in square brackets
- examples :
DECLARE SHORT a1 [10] (table with 1 dimension and 10 elements).
DECLARE SHORT a2 [10] [10] [10] (table with 3 dimensions). The total number of
elements in table a2 is the product of the size in all dimensions (here 10*10*10 =
1000).
Note
Several single variables of the same type may be declared on a single line by separating their
names with commas : DECLARE SHORT s1, s2, s3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/11
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Mnemonic symbol constants
These represent a numerical value by means of a mnemonic symbol.
Since mnemonic symbol constants are shared by all procedures, they must be declared
outside the procedures. Also, like local variables, a mnemonic symbol constant must be
defined in all the procedure files which use it. A mnemonic symbol constant is declared
as follows :
- format : CONST name value
- name : max. of 30 characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and _)
- value : value of the constant
- example : CONST PI = 3.14159
Notes
• The = sign must be present.
• Only one constant may be declared per line.
Numerical and string values
Numerical and string values are not declared.
Numerical values may be assigned to variables in the database or to local variables.
They may also be used in calculations wherever a numerical operand is expected.
• Integer values may be represented in several ways, according to how they are used
and the type of data represented. If the data is binary or analog and if the value is an
integer, the following notations may be used :
- Decimal integer value : String of numbers from 0 to 9. The first number cannot, under
any circumstances, be zero.
- Octal integer value : String of numbers from 0 to 7. The first two characters must be
zero.
- Hexadecimal integer value : String of numbers from 0 to 9 or letters A to F (or a to f).
The first two characters must be 0x.
- Binary integer value : String of numbers from 0 to 1. The first two characters must
be 0b.
F
Example : _x = 15
_x = 0o17
_x = 0x0F
_x = 0b1001
• Floating point values observe floating point or exponential notation :
- Floating point values consist of numbers 0 to 9 and the decimal point.
- Exponential values consist of numbers 0 to 9 and the decimal point (compulsory).
An E, E-, e or e- character precedes the exponential part of the value. For example,
4.5 E-8.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/12
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Character string values can be assigned to message type variables in the database or
to local STRING type variables, but not to numerical type variables.
A string of characters is a sequence of consecutive ASCII characters entered between
double quotes :
Example : "OK" is a character string value consisting of the O and K characters.
To write a character string value consisting of ASCII codes which cannot be printed,
please refer to the table below :
Any
ASCII code
CHR(xxx) where xxx is ASCII code.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Unprintable ASCII code
\b
Backspace (BS)
\t
Horizontal tab (HT)
\r
Carriage return (CR)
\n
Line Feed (LF)
\f
Form Feed (FF)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Non-numeric and non-alphabetic Backslash followed by the character :
ASCII code
\\
Backslash
\'
Single quote
\"
Double quote
Examples :
CHR (33)
"\n"
"\"
"ABC\n"
"MENU"
"\""
Escape,
Line Feed,
Single quote,
A, B, C, LF,
M, E, N, U,
Double quote.
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/13
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Procedures
A procedural declaration is required for referencing a procedure one wishes to call up
in a procedure (CALL proc).
Example :
PROC A
BEGIN
DECLARE PROC B
•
CALL B
(since procedure B has not yet been defined but has already been
END
declared, the call is correct.
PROC B
If it had not been declared, this call would initiate an error)
BEGIN
•
CALL A
(since procedure A has been defined before B, the call is correct)
END
A procedural declaration takes the form :
DECLARE PROC name or
DECLARE PROC name (type [, type])
The second form must be used when the procedure has arguments. It is sufficient to
mention the types of parameter.
The number and type must correspond to the definition of the procedure. The same
types are allowed as for local variables : SHORT, LONG, FLOAT and STRING.
The elements in the database are always converted into one of these types when their
value is changed from a parameter to a procedure. A table cannot be changed from an
argument to a procedure.
Example :
F
PROC A
BEGIN
DECLARE SHORT B
DECLARE SHORT C, AFF
DECLARE PROC D (SHORT, SHORT)
B = 5
C = 7
CALL D(B, C)
AFF = B
'=> AFF always equals 5
END
PROC D (SHORT B, SHORT C)
BEGIN
B = B + C
END
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/14
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.6 Definition of the procedure
_______________________________________________________________________________________
A procedure is a series of instructions or "formulas" which describe the operation to be
performed.
Several procedures can be defined in the same procedures file, but each file must
contain a main procedure (with the same name as the file).
Note
The main procedure cannot take a parameter.
Definition of the procedure is as follows :
PROC name
BEGIN
<declarations>
<instructions>
END
Each definition of a procedure begins with the word PROC followed by the name of the
procedure (with no blank lines and no comment), followed by the keyword BEGIN.
A procedure other than the main procedure may have arguments :
PROC name (type name1 [, type name2])
BEGIN
•
•
END
The declaration zone in the procedure is optional. A variable declared in the procedure
cannot be used outside it. Declarations, if there are any, must be located before
instructions.
Note
All procedures must have a trigger, even if they are called using the CALL proc. In this case it is
considered as an intermediate variable.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/15
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Instructions
A procedure definition contains one or more instructions. An instruction or "formula"
describes the math or logic operations to be performed.
An instruction has the following components :
numeric value
directive variable
IF
(
temp
<
0
OR temp
> = 100
)
'scale ?
operator
expression
comment
• Directive : This is a keyword which appears in the instruction line and which
determines the type of operation to be performed. A directive cannot be included in
an expression.
Note
A keyword is a sequence of consecutive ASCII characters with a precise meaning in the language.
Therefore, a keyword cannot be used as a variable (identifier). Section 1.7 gives the list of keywords
for the language.
The following directives are recognized :
Directive
Use
Meaning
_______________________________________________________________________________________
=
x = expr
Assigns expr to x by writing to the database.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
==
x == expr
Assigns expr to x by forced writing to the database.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
IF
IF expr
Tests the expression which follows IF.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
F
THEN
THEN block
(Compulsory). The block is executed if the test is TRUE.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
ELSE
ELSE block
(Optional). The block is executed if the test is FALSE.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
ENDIF
ENDIF
(Compulsory) Marks the end of an IF-THEN-ELSE block.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
WHILE
WHILE expr
The WHILE block is executed as long as expr is TRUE.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
WEND
WEND
(Compulsory) Marks the end of a WHILE block.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/16
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Directive
Use
Meaning
_______________________________________________________________________________________
BEGIN
BEGIN
Marks the start of a program.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
END
END
Marks the end of a program.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CALL
CALL proc
Executes the proc procedure, then returns to current program.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PROC
PROC block
Defines a procedure.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
DECLARE
DECLARE
Defines a variable or an identifier.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PRINT
PRINT
Displays a state on the RUNMGR run-time manager screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
LOCK
LOCK
Locks the alternation of tasks.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
UNLOCK
UNLOCK
Unlocks the alternation of tasks.
Note
The elements in the Use column are as follows :
• x is a variable to which a value can be assigned. x can be a variable (identifier) or a local variable,
but not a function.
• expr is any expression.
• block is a sequence of instructions.
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/17
_______________________________________________________________________________________
• Expression : This is a set of mathematical instructions which can be evaluated. An
expression is composed of the following elements :
- Operators (keywords which indicate the operations)
- Variables (identifiers of elements in the database or local variables)
- Constants (symbolic, numeric or string)
- Functions
In a well-constructed expression, the brackets must be balanced and all the operators
must have the correct number and type of operands. An expression cannot contain
a directive.
The following are examples of valid expressions (assuming that the types of data are
correct) :
5
x+1
x + 3.5
TEMP < 0 OR TEMP >= 100
OUTRANGE AND (VALVE1 = 1 OR VALVE2 = 1)
100 * sin (VOLT1 - VOLT2)
DISPLAY = "MENU"
"Screen1"
• Operator : This is a keyword which occurs in an expression. Like all keywords, an
operator cannot be used as a variable (identifier).
Operators specify the type of operation to be performed. They can be unitary or binary,
depending on whether they admit one or two operands.
F
The calculation task recognizes the following groups of operators, in ascending order
of priority :
- Arithmetic
- Relational
- Logic
- On bits
- On groups
- Changes of state
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/18
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Arithmetic operators
These perform arithmetic operations on their operands.
Operator
Type
Use
Operand
Name of the operation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
+
binary
x+y
numeric
addition
_______________________________________________________________________________________
+
binary
x+y
string
concatenation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
binary
x-y
numeric
subtraction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
unitary
-x
numeric
negation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
*
binary
x*y
numeric
multiplication
_______________________________________________________________________________________
/ or DIV
binary
x/y
numeric
division
_______________________________________________________________________________________
MOD or %
binary
x%y
integer
modulo
Arithmetic operators, except for modulo, accept all types of numerical operands
(including floating point). Modulo only accepts integers (and in the case of elements
in the database, any combination of binary or analog type).
Modulo (x MOD y) is defined as the remainder from the integer division of x by y.
Examples of arithmetic operations are given below :
Operation
Result
_______________________________________________________________________________________
17 / 5 = 3
The quotient is 3, the remainder is lost.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
17 % 5 = 2
The quotient is lost, the remainder is 2.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
17.0 / 5 = 3.4
The result is converted into floating point.
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/19
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Relational operators
These perform a comparison of two numerical operands and produce a significant
Boolean result.
Operator
Type
Use
Name
Result
_______________________________________________________________________________________
=
binary
x=y
equal to
1 if x = y
0 if x < > y
_______________________________________________________________________________________
!= or <>
binary
x != y
different from
1 if x ≠ y
0 if x = y
_______________________________________________________________________________________
<
binary
x<y
less than
1 if x < y
0 of x ≥ y
_______________________________________________________________________________________
>
binary
x>y
greater than
1 if x > y
0 if x ≤ y
_______________________________________________________________________________________
<= or =<
binary
x <= y
less than or
1 if x ≤ y
equal to
0 if x > y
_______________________________________________________________________________________
>= or =>
binary
x >= y
greater than or
equal to
1 if x ≥ y
0 if x < y
The table below gives examples using these operators, where x = 3.
Operation
Value
_______________________________
F
x < 10
x<3
x<2
x > 12
x>2
x>3
x != 4
x != 3
x=4
x=3
x <= 3
x <= 4
x <= 2
x >= 2
x >= 3
x >= 4
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/20
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Logic operators on numerical operands
These perform logic operations on their operands, which have the value which is not
zero (TRUE) or equal to zero (FALSE). The result of the operation is 1 (TRUE) or 0
(FALSE).
Operator
Type
Use
Name
Result
_______________________________________________________________________________________
NOT
unitary
NOT x
Negation
1 if x = 0
0 if x ≠ 0
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1 if x ≠ 0 and y ≠ 0
0 if x = 0 or y = 0 or
x and y = 0
_______________________________________________________________________________________
AND
binary
x AND y
Conjunction
OR
binary
x OR y
Disjunction
1 if x ≠ 0 or y ≠ 0 or
x and y ≠ 0
0 if x and y = 0
Note
Spaces must be placed before and after the keywords NOT, AND and OR to avoid any confusion
with identifiers when evaluating formulas.
The table below gives examples using these operators :
Operation
Value
_______________________________
NOT 3
NOT 0
0 AND 1
1 AND 2
0 AND 0
2 OR 3
0 OR 2
0 OR 0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/21
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Bit to bit logic operators
These are used to work on the bits making up their numerical operands, which are all
transformed into integers before the operation.
Operator
Type
Use
Operand
Name of the operation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
!
unitary
!x
integer
complement
_______________________________________________________________________________________
&
binary
x&y
integer
AND
_______________________________________________________________________________________
|
binary
x|y
integer
inclusive OR
_______________________________________________________________________________________
~ or XOR
binary
x~y
integer
exclusive OR
The table below gives examples of operations on bits :
Operation
Binary correspondence
Result
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9 & 10
9 = 1001
10 = 1010
_________
1000
8
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9 | 10
9 = 1001
10 = 1010
_________
1011
11
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9 ~ 10
9 = 1001
10 = 1010
_________
0011
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9 & -10
9 = 0000000000001001
-10 = 1111111111110110
_____________________
1111111111111111
-1
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/22
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Grouping operators
The following operators are used to group data together :
- Brackets, which are used to define sub-expressions and thus to regulate the order
of evaluation of a formula. Brackets are also used to delimit parameters moved to
a function.
- Square brackets, which are used to delimit indices in tables. Several pairs of square
brackets are used for tables with several dimensions.
- Commas, which are used to separate different arguments given to a function.
The table below summarizes grouping operators :
Operator
Type
Use
Operand
Name of the operation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
(
/
/
all types
open bracket
_______________________________________________________________________________________
)
/
/
all types
close bracket
_______________________________________________________________________________________
[
/
/
all types
open square bracket
_______________________________________________________________________________________
]
/
/
all types
close square bracket
_______________________________________________________________________________________
,
/
/
all types
comma
Changing state operators
These are used to test whether an element in the database has changed value since
last read.
Operator
Type
Use
Operand
Name of the operation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
?
unitary
?x
identifier
change of state
This operator works as follows. The result of ?x is TRUE, if the value of x has changed
since last read or since the last evaluation of ?x. It is FALSE, if the value of x has not
changed. Therefore :
y = y + ?x increments the value of y each time x changes value.
y
5
5
6
6
6
15
x=y
5
5
6
6
6
15
?x
0
0
1
0
0
1
x == y
5
5
6
6
6
15
?x
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note : it is possible to force the change of state using the directive ==.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/23
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Priority of operators
Most high-level languages specify the rules for priority and association for determining
the order in which the operations are executed.
When there are two operations with different priorities, the program executes the one
with the highest priority first. If the operations have the same priority, the program
evaluates them according to their rules of association (either from left to right or from
right to left, depending on the type of operator).
Brackets have a high priority so they can be used to regulate the order of evaluation
in an expression.
The table below describes arithmetic and logic operators, in decreasing order of
priority. Operators written at the same line have the same priority :
Priority
Operator
Type
Rules of association
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Highest
?
unitary
/
_______________________________________________________________________________________
() [ ]
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
- NOT
unitary
right to left
_______________________________________________________________________________________
* / MOD ^
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
+binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
< <= > >=
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
= !=
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
&
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
~
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
|
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
AND
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
OR
binary
left to right
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Lowest
= ==
variable
/
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/24
1
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The following examples illustrate the evaluation of formulas which contain various
operator priorities :
Example
Explanation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
x < 5*y + 10 AND NOT zflag
According to the law of priority, the order of evaluation is as
follows : NOT, *, +, < and AND. Thus, the program evaluates
the expression as if it contained brackets :
(x < ((5*y) + 10)) AND (NOT zflag)
In order to perform addition before multiplication, add brackets
to modify the priority :
x < 5*(y+10) AND NOT zflag
_______________________________________________________________________________________
x*y/z
Because * and / have the same priority and rules of
association, the program executes * and then /. It evaluates
the expression as if the following brackets were present :
(x*y) / z
_______________________________________________________________________________________
x = NOT NOT y
The program evaluates this expression as if the following
brackets were present :
x = (NOT (NOT y))
This expression gives the value of 1 to x if y is not zero,
otherwise x is equal to 0. This is equivalent to :
x = y != 0
_______________________________________________________________________________________
x = NOT ?y
The program evaluates this expression as if the following
brackets were present :
x = (NOT (?y))
_______________________________________________________________________________________
x = NOT y = z
The program evaluates this expression as if the following
brackets were present :
x = ((NOT y) = z)
This expression is different from
x = NOT (y = z) which is equivalent to
x = y != z
_______________________________________________________________________________________
a = 1 AND b != 2 OR
c = 3 AND d != 4
The program evaluates this expression as if the following
brackets were present :
((a = 1) AND (b != 2)) OR
((c = 3) AND (d != 4))
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/25
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Example
Explanation
_______________________________________________________________________________________
x=a=b<c
The program evaluates this expression as if the following
brackets were present :
x = (a = (b < c))
This expression gives the value 1 to x if a has the same TRUE
value (1 or 0) as the comparison b < c.
If this is not the case, the expression gives x the value 0.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
x + y << 4 + z << 8
The program evaluates this expression as if the following
brackets were present :
((x + y) << (4 + z)) << 8
_______________________________________________________________________________________
x&1|y&2|z&4
The program evaluates this expression as if the following
brackets were present :
((x & 1) | (y & 2) | (z & 4)
It is not very important to know which instruction is executed
first, but the program evaluates the expression from left to
right because of the rule of association.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
f(2*x+3, 4*y+5) - g(x,y)/2
The program evaluates this expression as if the following
brackets were present :
f (((2*x)+3), ((4*y)+5)) - (g(x,y)/2)
• Variable : refer to section 1.5,
• Constant : refer to section 1.5.
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/26
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
• Function : A formula may contain predefined functions defined in the math library.
Library function
The Math and logic task provides the following function categories :
- Data conversion
- Controlling directories (GETDIR, GETDRIVE),
- I/O (PRINT)
- Math (ABS, COS, EXP, LOG, LOGE, POW, RND, SIN, SQR, TAN)
- Manipulating a character string (ALLTRIM, ASC, CHR, INSTR, LEN, LOWER,
LTRIM, SUBSTR, TRIM, UPPER),
- Stopping the task (EXIT).
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/27
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The following list gives an example of use and a description of each predefined
function in the Math and logic task :
- Mathematical functions
Function
Format
Description
ABS
x = ABS(y)
Absolute value of y
Example : x = ABS(-5)
Thus
: x = 5
COS
x = COS(y)
Cosine y. y is expressed in radians
Example : x = COS(.4)
Thus
: x = 0.922061
EXP
x = EXP(y)
Exponential of y
Example : x = EXP(4)
Thus
: x = 54.59815
LOG
x = LOG(y)
Logarithm to the base 10 of y
Example : x = LOG(100)
Thus
: x = 2
LOGE
x = LOGE(y)
Natural logarithm of y
Example : x = LOGE(1)
Thus
: x = 0
POW
F
x = y POW z
Power zth of y
Example : x = 2 POW 3
Thus
: x = 8
RND
x = RND
Random number between 0 and 65535
Example : x = RND
Thus
: x = 32789
SIN
x = SIN(y)
Sine y. y is expressed in radians
Example : x = SIN(1.5)
Thus
: x = 0.9974951
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/28
1
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Function
Format
Description
SQR
x = SQR(y)
Square root of y
Example : x = SQR(144)
Thus
: x = 12
TAN
x = TAN(y)
Tangent of y. y is expressed in radians
Example : x = TAN(.785)
Thus
: x = 1
- Directory functions
Function
Format
Description
GETDIR
string = GETDIR (drive)
Sends the current directory to
the specified drive :
0 current drive
1 a:
2 b:
etc.
Example : string = GETDIR (1)
: string = a:
Result
GETDRIVE
Example
Result
drive = GETDRIVE
Sends the code for the current
drive :
1 a:
2 b:
etc.
: drive = GETDRIVE
: drive = 2 (fir b:)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/29
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
- Functions on strings of characters
Function
Format
Description
ALLTRIM
str1 = ALLTRIM (str2)
Sends the input string str2 after
having deleted the blanks at the
beginning and end of the string.
Example
Result
ASC
Example
Result
CHR
Example
Result
INSTR
Example
Result
LEN
F
Example
Result
LOWER
Example
Result
: string = ALLTRIM ("
: string = "HELLO"
HELLO
x = ASC (string)
")
Sends the ASCII code of the first
character in the string.
: x = ASC ("Ten")
: x = 68 (ASCII code for the letter D)
string = CHR (var)
Sends
the
character
corresponding to the ASCII code.
: string = CHR (66)
: string = "B" (66 is the ASCII code for the letter B)
x = INSTR (str1, str2)
Sends the position (offset) of str2
in str1.
: x = INSTR ("ABCDE", "B")
: x = 2
x = LEN (string)
Sends the length of the string,
disregarding the delimiter 0.
: x = LEN ("MIAMI")
: x = 10
str1 = LOWER (str2)
Sends the string str2 converted
into lower case letters.
: str1 = LOWER ("NOT")
: str1 = "not"
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/30
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Function
Format
Description
LTRIM
str1 = LTRIM (str2)
Sends the input string str2 after
having deleted the blanks at the
beginning of the string.
Example
Result
SUBSTR
Example
Result
TRIM
Example
Result
UPPER
Example
Result
: string = LTRIM ("
HELLO
: string = "HELLO "
")
str1 = SUBSTR (str2, offset, len)
Sends a sub-string of str2, of
length len (at least) and starting
with the character whose position
is given by offset.
: string = SUBSTR ("ABCDE", 3, 2)
: string = "CD"
str1 = TRIM (str2)
: string = TRIM ("
HELLO
: string = "
HELLO"
str1 = UPPER (str2)
Sends the input string str2 after
having deleted the blanks at the
end of the string.
")
Sends the string str2 converted
into upper case letters.
: string = UPPER ("Hello")
: string = "HELLO"
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/31
_______________________________________________________________________________________
- Various functions
Function
Format
Description
ARGCNT
x = ARGCNT
Sends the number of arguments
in the program.
Example
Result
GETARG
Example
Result
: x = ARGCNT
: x = 3 if the program has 3 arguments
x = GETARG (num_arg)
Sends the argument with the
specified number.
: x = GETARG (2)
: x = "TEST" if the second argument is "TEST"
-Predefined functions
Syntax
Description
_______________________________________________________________________________________
EXIT (status)
Exits the program, setting the return value to : status.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
LOCK
Locks the alternation of tasks for a limited time. This
is used to inhibit access to the database from another
task. There must be an UNLOCK instruction in the
program for each LOCK.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
UNLOCK
F
Unlocks the alternation of task switching and thus
allows other tasks to access the database again. It
should be noted that if a code requiring a lot of CPU
time is placed between LOCK and UNLOCK, this
can reduce system performance (no other task can
access the database during this time).
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PRINT "The reply is :"+i
Displays each parameter, by converting it into a
string if required, on the line in the control screen for
the Math and logic task.
Displays the messages on the line associated with
the Math and logic task, in the Run-time manager
screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/32
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
• Comment : This is the third component of a formula. A comment must be placed after
a ' (quote) sign and can extend to the end of the line.
Comments are not interpreted by the system. They are ignored except in the
declaration part.
Comments cannot overlap. The following is an example of the use of comments :
'Declaration of local variables
DECLARE DIG _INIT_FLAG
DECLARE SHORT _n
DECLARE SHORT tab [100]
PROC EXAMPLE
BEGIN
'Initialization to be executed the first time only
IFNOT _INIT_FLAG THEN 'At the beginning, _INIT_FLAG = 0
'Init of a, b, c (variables in the database)
A = 10
B = 20
C = 30
'Init table : tab [_n] = _n for n = 0, 1, ....
n = 0
WHILE _n < 100
tab [_n] = _n
_n = _n + 1
WEND
_INIT_FLAG = 1 'Init done, thus _INIT_FLAG to 1
ENDIF
'Next : section to be executed each time.
END
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/33
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Types of instruction
There are 3 types of instruction :
• Assignment instructions
• Control instructions
• Call procedures.
Assigning
This is used to assign a value to a variable. Assigning may take one of two forms :
- x = expr,
- x == expr.
The Math and logic task evaluates the expression and then assigns the result to
element x in the database.
Syntax
Result
_______________________________________________________________________________________
=
Assigning is done by a write operation to the database.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
==
Assigning is done by forced writing to the database (the change bits are set
to 1, even if the value has not changed).
Note
If x is a local variable or an element of a table, the program uses the assignment operator = to
perform the operation.
Examples
x = 47.1
x=x+1
a[3] = a[0] + a[1] + a[2] /3
x == x
'Assigning in a local table
'Forced write
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/34
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Control instruction
This instruction is used to check the circumstances under which a code block (i.e.
sequence of instructions) must be executed.
* IF / ENDIF
The syntax is as follows :
IF expr THEN
Block to be executed if expr is TRUE
ELSE
Optional block to be executed if expr is FALSE
ENDIF
The word THEN must immediately follow the expression to be tested (on the same
line) and the assimilated block is compulsory.
The ELSE block is optional. However, each IF must be closed by an ENDIF.
Examples
IF x = 1 THEN
a=a+1
b=b-1
ELSE
a=a-1
b=b+1
ENDIF
IF NOT init_flag THEN
a = 10
b = 20
c = 30
ENDIF
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/35
_______________________________________________________________________________________
* WHILE / WEND
This instruction is used to execute a code block repetitively, until an expression
becomes FALSE.
The syntax is as follows :
WHILE expr
block to be executed as long as expr is TRUE
WEND
If the expression is FALSE when the program evaluates the first time, the block is not
executed.
If the expression is NEVER FALSE, the loop NEVER ends! Therefore, the expression
must be able to take the FALSE value or else the program can be locked in the loop.
Examples
n=0
WHILE n < 10
a[n] = -1
n=n+1
WEND
fib[O] = x
fib[1] = y
n=2
WHILE n < 100 AND fib[n-1] < 10000
fib[n] = fib[n-2] + fib[n-1]
n=n+1
WEND
Note
Blocks which are executed conditionally can be moved for easier reading of the program, but this
has no effect on execution of the program.
F
Call procedures
This type of instruction is used to initiate the execution of predefined or user-defined
procedures.
The syntax is as follows :
CALL name_procedure (var1, var2, ...).
Note
A procedure which is called must always have a trigger.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/36
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Overlapping blocks
Blocks which have been delimited by control instructions or locking can be overlapped,
up to a depth of 100. This implies that each block is correctly delimited with an ENDIF
or a WEND. The following example shows overlapping blocks :
IF x = y THEN
n=0
WHILE n < 10
a[n] = 0
n=n+1
WEND
ELSE
IF x > y THEN
a[x-y] = -1
IF alarm THEN
PRINT "I have found it"
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
F
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/37
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.7 Keywords
_______________________________________________________________________________________
A keyword is a sequence of consecutive ASCII characters, without any spaces between
them, which is part of the basic vocabulary of the language and which has a predefined
meaning.
Therefore, keywords cannot be used as variable identifiers.
There are two types of keyword :
• Operators,
• Directives.
The following gives a list of the keywords for the Math and logic task :
ABS
ALLTRIM
AND
ARGCNT
ASC
BEGIN
CALL
CHR
CONST
COS
DECLARE
DIV
ELSE
END
ENDIF
EQU
EXIT
EXP
GE
F
GETARG
GETDIR
GETDRIVE
GT
IF
INSTR
LE
LEN
LOCK
LOG
LOGE
LONG
LOWER
LT
LTRIM
MOD
MUL
NE
NOT
NOR
OR
POW
PRINT
PROC
RND
SHORT
SIN
SQR
STRING
SUBSTR
TAN
THEN
TRIM
UNLOCK
UPPER
WEND
WHILE
XOR
Although the following names do not have any particular significance, they cannot be
used as names for variables :
ANA
CHANGED
DIG
DO
FLOAT
FLP
INPUT
LINE
MSG
SETDIR
SETDRIVE
SYSTEM
TRACE
WAIT
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/38
______________________________________________________
Contents part G
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
1.2
Description of the application
Creating the application
G
___________________________________________________________________________
G/1
___________________________________________________________________________
G
___________________________________________________________________________
G/2
______________________________________________________
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Description of the application
1/2
_________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Creating the application
1/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2-1 Selecting the communication module
1/3
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.2-2 Creating static images
1/4
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.2-3 Defining the animation
1/5
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.2-4 Editing configuration tables
1/7
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.2-5 Creating the cartridge image and transferring it to the
communication module
1/8
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.2-6 Documentation for the application
1/8
_______________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/32
G
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 Description of the application
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The objective of this example is not to implement an operator dialog application in a real
process, but to explain to users how to set about creating an application. Therefore, the
example below, describing the control and monitoring of a furnace, is simple but
adequate for the purpose.
During operation, two graphics screens are displayed :
• The MENU screen is the first screen displayed for all applications. It is used in the
example for :
- Initializing the furnace parameters
- Accessing the main screen for the application (second screen)
- Accessing contextual on-line help
• The main screen, which is used to control operation of the furnace :
- Starting-up and stopping the furnace, the status being indicated by the ON/OFF lamp
(green when off and red when operating).
- Switching the furnace heating on and off, the status being indicated by the HEATING
lamp (black when there is no heat being supplied and flashing red when the furnace
is being heated).
- Accessing the alarm screen.
- Remote acknowledgment of alarms.
- Accessing the Run-time manager.
- Returning to the MENU screen.
- Accessing contextual on-line help.
- Entering the set-point temperature in degrees Kelvin.
- Displaying the ALARM SUPERVISOR band.
- Displaying the time and date.
- Displaying changes in temperature and giving the current value in degrees Celsius :
. Blue when the temperature is between 1000°C and 1500°C.
. Red when the temperature is between 1500°C and 2000°C.
. Dark red when the temperature is greater than 2000°C.
- Displaying a message giving the various states of the furnace : Furnace alarm,
Furnace heating up, Temperature OK, Temperature fault, Furnace shutdown and
Furnace operating.
G
Note
Bargraph evolution with respect to the set-point entered is defined by the MATH AND LOGIC task.
The variable SEC1, defined by the EVENT AND INTERVAL TIMER task, triggers this procedure
once a second.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2 Creating the application
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2-1 Selecting the communication module
Use the selection screen to define the parameters of the communication module :
• Select communication module : Appli_1
• Select the language of the keyboard connected to the module : US English
• Select the resolution of graphic images : 640 x 350 pixels
• Select multi-console operation
• Select the physical address of the communication module : Rack 0, Module 1.
G
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2-2 Creating static images
This operation is performed under GED.
MENU screen
• Draw the background screens using the INIT, GRAPH and HELP control buttons.
• Define the background colors.
• Enter and position the text.
• Save the drawing under MENU.
Main FURNACE screen
• Draw the following background screens :
- ON/OFF lamps and HEATING.
- Display field for the alarm band, date and time, temperature in degrees Celsius and
messages relating to the state of the furnace
- Bargraph showing changes in temperature.
- Field for entering the set-point temperature.
- ON/OFF, HEAT, ALARM, ACKNOWLEDGE, MANAGE, MENU and HELP control
buttons. When the same background screen is used several times, it is recommended that it be drawn once and given a mnemonic symbol. Then simply recall the
mnemonic symbol for the other drawings.
• Define all the background colors for the drawings.
• Enter and position the text.
• Save the drawing as FURNACE.
G
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/4
1
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2-3 Defining the animation
This operation is performed under ANT.
MENU screen
• Open the MENU.PIC file previously created under GED.
• Select the first background screen to animate using the INIT button. It is shown
outlined by 4 selection points.
• Define the type of animation from the Animate menu using the SET function key and
then enter its parameters (refer to section 5.001 in the listing).
• Do the same with the other background screens :
- GRAPH button, then SET function key.
- HELP button, then FOR function key.
• Save the animated screen. It is not possible to test function key type animations.
G
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Main FURNACE screen
• Open the FURNACE.PIC file.
• Define the animation on the screen backgrounds (refer to section 5.002) :
- Alarm band display zone : text output.
- Zone for entering the set-point temperature : text input.
- Zone for displaying the state of the furnace : message box. Enter the messages in
the FURNACE.BAM file.
- Changes in temperature : bargraph.
- ON/OFF button : TGL function key.
- HEAT button : TGL function key.
- ALARM button : FOR function key.
- ACKNOWLEDGE button : TGL function key.
- MANAGE button : FOR function key.
- MENU button : SET function key.
- HELP button : FOR function key.
- ON/OFF lamp : paint.
- HEATING lamp : paint.
- Zone for displaying date and time : text output.
- Zone for displaying temperature in degrees Celsius : numerical output.
• Save the animated screen.
G
• Test the animations to check that they are correct and modify them if required.
• If modifications are made, save the new animated screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/6
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2-4 Editing configuration tables
Configuring the TIME-BASED DATA MANAGEMENT task
• Interval timer configuration tables : define the SEC1 = 1s variable refer to page 9-001
in the listing).
Configuring the MATH AND LOGIC task
• Configuration table for variables : Defines the variables required for the CALCULATION task (refer to page 7-001 in the listing),
• Configuration table for triggers : Associates the activator (trigger) SEC1 with the
KELTOCEL procedure.
• Procedures file : Defines the KELTOCEL procedure which is used to calculate the
temperature of the furnace according to the set-point temperature entered (refer to
page 7-002 in the listing).
Configuring the ALARM SUPERVISOR
• Configuration table for checking alarms (refer to page 8-001 in the listing) :
- Define the color of the alarm screen background.
- Define the variable associated with the alarm band.
- Define the remote acknowledgment of alarms variable.
• Configuration table for groups of alarms : Define the FURNACE group of alarms to
which the application alarms belong (refer to page 8-005 in the listing),
• Alarm definition table : Define the temperature alarm (refer to page 8-002 in the listing).
Configuring the HELP task
Enter the help text and then save it (refer to section 10 in the listing).
G
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/7
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2-5 Creating the cartridge image and transferring it to the communication
module
• Create the cartridge image using the Create tables item in the Create menu. Select
Create tables with coherence to check coherence of variables.
• Select the tasks to transfer to the communication module, using the Select tasks item
on the Create menu. The tasks are ALARM SUPERVISOR, GRAPHICS, RUN -TIME
MANAGER, UPLOAD, TIMERS, COMMUNICATION, MATH AND LOGIC and HELP.
• Transfer the files created to the communication module.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2-6 Documentation for the application
Document the application using the Utilities menu (enter the title page and the footer)
and then print the dossier (see following pages).
G
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/8
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
TTTTTTTTTTTT
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
TT
77777777777777777777777
7777777777777777777777
77
SSSSSSSSS 77
SS
777
SS
777
SSSSSSSSS
7SS
77SS
SSSSSSSSS
77777
777777
7777777
7777777
xproprj\recipe\recipe
TITLE :
Designer :
User :
Maintenance :
REV.
XX
X
XX
X
XX X
XX
X XX
X
XX
X
XX
MMI
FURNACE
Company
Telemecanique
DATE
Department
Manager
DIV 4
REVISION
DESIGNER
IMPLEMENTED
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
TSX
rev
COVER PAGE
date
12/7 /91
page
11
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/9
_______________________________________________________________________________________
APPLICATION VERSION
Date of last update : 12/07/91
Type of module
: PCM37
Module number
: PCM_1
Description of application
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
: PCM 1 appli description
rev
APPLICATION VERSION
date
12/7 /91
page
2-001
CONTENTS
TITLE
SECTION
COVER PAGE
APPLICATION VERSION
CONTENTS
CROSS REFERENCE
ANIMATION SCREENS
MENU
FURNACE
CM
TSX COMMUNICATION
MATH AND LOGIC
ALARM SUPERVISOR
TIMER
OPTIONS
help
1
2
3
4
5
5.001
5.002
6
7
8
9
10
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
rev
CONTENTS
date
12/7 /91
page
3-001
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/10
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
ALACTIVE
A_DAY
A_DOW
A_DOY
A_HOUR
A_MIN
A_MONTH
A_SCRNO1
A_SCRNO2
A_SCRNO3
A_SCRNO4
A_SEC
A_YEAR
INDBAM
number of active alarms
Analog form of day
Analog form of day of week
Analog form of Julian day of year
Analog form of hour
Analog form of minutes
Analog form of month
scr num for graph TASK 1
scr num for graph task 2
scr num for graph task 3
scr num for graph task 4
Analog form of seconds
Analog form of year
BAM index for furnace status
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
SHUTTIME
TASK1
TASK10
TASK11
TASK12
TASK13
TASK14
TASK2
TASK3
TASK4
TASK5
TASK6
TASK7
TASK8
TASK9
TEMPCELS
Number of minutes until shutdown
Task 1 status
Task 10 status
Task 11 status
Task 12 status
Task 13 status
Task 14 status
Task 2 status
Task 3 status
Task 4 status
Task 5 status
Task 6 status
Task 7 status
Task 8 status
Task 9 status
Temperature of furnace in °Celsus
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
BAM
TSXCOM
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
ALAL2
BAR
IMLTAGS
NBR
TSXCOM
IMLTAGS
INP
SEL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
A
TEMPKEL
Setpoint of temperature in °K
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
UNACKALM
_ASYS030
_ASYS031
_ASYS032
_ASYS033
_ASYS034
_ASYS035
_ASYS036
_ASYS037
Count of unacknowledged alarms
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
DIVERSE
FURNACE
W15
FURNACE
KELTOCEL
FURNACE
W10
KELTOCEL
FURNACE
MENU
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-001
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/11
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
_ASYS038
_ASYS039
_ASYS040
_ATAG026
_ATAG027
_ATAG028
_ATAG029
_ATAG041
_ATAG042
_ATAG043
_ATAG044
_ATAG068
_ATAG069
_ATAG070
_ATAG071
_ATAG072
_ATAG073
_ATAG074
_ATAG075
_ATAG076
_ATAG077
_ATAG078
_ATAG079
_ATAG080
_ATAG081
_ATAG082
_ATAG083
_ATAG084
_ATAG085
_ATAG086
_ATAG087
_ATAG088
_ATAG089
_ATAG090
_ATAG091
_ATAG092
_ATAG093
_ATAG094
_ATAG095
_ATAG096
_ATAG097
_ATAG098
_ATAG099
_A_PRTSC
_A_SPOOL
_CURSORX
_CURSORY
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
Print screen internal use
reserved
X-coordinate for graphics cursor
Y-coordinate for graphics cursor
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
DIVERSE
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-002
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/12
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
_FREE1
_FREE10
_FREE11
_FREE12
_FREE13
_FREE14
_FREE15
_FREE2
_FREE3
_FREE4
_FREE5
_FREE6
_FREE7
_FREE8
_FREE9
ACK_AL
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
Remote acknowledgement of alarms
D
D
ALOGMASK
HEAT
Alarm Supervisor Mask Bit
Heat control
D
D
KEYGONE
MA_AR
Electronic Key is missing
Run stop status of furnace
D
SEC1
Trigger 1 sec for KELTOCEL proc
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
SHUTDOWN
SHUTREQ
TSX_AUD
_DTAG005
_DTAG006
_DTAG007
_DTAG008
_DTAG009
_DTAG010
_DTAG011
_DTAG012
_DTAG013
_DTAG014
_DTAG015
_DTAG016
_DTAG017
_DTAG018
_DTAG019
Shutdown is in progress
Shutdown has been requested
Audible alarms active
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
ALSETUP2
SEL
GLOBAL
IMLTAGS
PNT
SEL
TSXCOM
GLOBAL
IMLTAGS
PNT
SEL
TSXCOM
IMLTRIG
ITIMER
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
DIVERSE
FURNACE
KELTOCEL
FURNACE
FURNACE
B2
KELTOCEL
FURNACE
FURNACE
B1
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-003
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/13
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
_DTAG020
_DTAG021
_DTAG022
_DTAG023
_DTAG024
_DTAG025
_DTAG026
_DTAG027
_DTAG028
_DTAG029
_DTAG030
_DTAG031
_DTAG032
_DTAG033
_DTAG034
_DTAG035
_DTAG036
_DTAG037
_DTAG038
_DTAG039
_DTAG040
_DTAG041
_DTAG042
_DTAG043
_DTAG044
_DTAG045
_DTAG046
_DTAG047
_DTAG048
_DTAG049
_DTAG050
_DTAG051
_DTAG052
_DTAG053
_DTAG054
_DTAG055
_DTAG056
_DTAG057
_DTAG058
_DTAG059
_DTAG060
_DTAG061
_DTAG062
_DTAG063
_DTAG064
_DTAG065
_DTAG066
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
DIVERSE
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-004
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/14
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
_DTAG067
_DTAG068
_DTAG069
_DTAG070
_DTAG071
_DTAG072
_DTAG073
_DTAG074
_DTAG075
_DTAG076
_DTAG077
_DTAG078
_DTAG079
_DTAG080
_DTAG081
_DTAG082
_DTAG083
_DTAG084
_DTAG085
_DTAG086
_DTAG087
_DTAG088
_DTAG089
_DTAG090
_DTAG091
_DTAG092
_DTAG093
_DTAG094
_DTAG095
_DTAG096
_DTAG097
_DTAG098
_FTAG001
_FTAG002
_FTAG003
_FTAG004
_FTAG005
_FTAG006
_FTAG007
_FTAG008
_FTAG009
_FTAG010
_FTAG011
_FTAG012
_FTAG013
_FTAG014
_FTAG015
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
DIVERSE
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-005
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/15
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
_FTAG016
_FTAG017
_FTAG018
_FTAG019
_FTAG020
_FTAG021
_FTAG022
_FTAG023
_FTAG024
_FTAG025
_FTAG026
_FTAG027
_FTAG028
_FTAG029
_FTAG030
_FTAG031
_FTAG032
_FTAG033
_FTAG034
_FTAG035
_FTAG036
_FTAG037
_FTAG038
_FTAG039
_FTAG040
_FTAG041
_FTAG042
_FTAG043
_FTAG044
_FTAG045
_FTAG046
_FTAG047
_FTAG048
_FTAG049
_FTAG050
_FTAG051
_FTAG052
_FTAG053
_FTAG054
_FTAG055
_FTAG056
_FTAG057
_FTAG058
_FTAG059
_FTAG060
_FTAG061
_FTAG062
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
DIVERSE
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-006
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/16
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
M
_FTAG063
_FTAG064
_FTAG065
_FTAG066
_FTAG067
_FTAG068
_FTAG069
_FTAG070
_FTAG071
_FTAG072
_FTAG073
_FTAG074
_FTAG075
_FTAG076
_FTAG077
_FTAG078
_FTAG079
_FTAG080
_FTAG081
_FTAG082
_FTAG083
_FTAG084
_FTAG085
_FTAG086
_FTAG087
_FTAG088
_FTAG089
_FTAG090
_FTAG091
_FTAG092
_FTAG093
_FTAG094
_FTAG095
_FTAG096
_FTAG097
_FTAG098
_FTAG099
BANDEAU
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
M
M
M
B_001002
DATE
DATETIME
Day of week and date
Date and Time
M
DISPLAY
Current display name (RTG)
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
ALSETUP2
TXT
BAM
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
TXT
GLOBAL
SEL
M
DISPLAY1
new screen for GRAPH
DIVERSE
FURNACE
FURNACE
FURNACE
FURNACE
MENU
GLOBAL
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-007
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/17
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
DISPLAY2
DISPLAY3
DISPLAY4
MEXECPGM
M_DOY
M_SETDAT
M_SETTIM
M_YYDOY
M_YYMMDD
SYSERROR
SYSTASK
new screen for GRAPH2
new screen for GRAPH3
new screen for GRAPH4
Name of DVP / PIF file to exec
Day of year (Jan. 1 = 001)
Tag to set date (local format)
Tag to set time (HH:MM:SS)
Year and day of year
Date in year/month/day format
System error message
Start a system task
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
SEL
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
TASK10M
TASK11M
TASK12M
TASK13M
TASK14M
TASK1M
TASK2M
TASK3M
TASK4M
TASK5M
TASK6M
TASK7M
TASK8M
TASK9M
TIME
TSXDIAG
_FGPERM
_FGPREV
_FGREQ
_MSTAT01
_MSTAT02
_MSTAT03
_MSTAT04
_MSTAT05
_MSTAT06
_MSTAT07
_MSTAT08
_MSTAT09
_MSTAT10
_MSTAT11
_MSTAT12
_MSTAT13
_MSTAT14
_MSTAT15
_MTAG065
Task 10 status message
Task 11 status message
Task 12 status message
Task 13 status message
Task 14 status message
Task 1 status message
Task 2 status message
Task 3 status message
Task 4 status message
Task 5 status message
Task 6 status message
Task 7 status message
Task 8 status message
Task 9 status message
Time hh:mm:ss
Used by topdiag
Foreground permission
Foreground previous
Foreground request
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
DIVERSE
FURNACE
MENU
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-008
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/18
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
_MTAG066
_MTAG067
_MTAG068
_MTAG069
_MTAG071
_MTAG072
_MTAG073
_MTAG074
_MTAG075
_MTAG076
_MTAG077
_MTAG078
_MTAG079
_MTAG080
_MTAG081
_MTAG082
_MTAG083
_MTAG084
_MTAG085
_MTAG086
_MTAG087
_MTAG088
_MTAG089
_MTAG090
_MTAG091
_MTAG092
_MTAG093
_MTAG094
_MTAG095
_MTAG096
_MTAG097
_MTAG098
_M_IPC
_M_SPOOL
_M_TRQ1A
_M_TRQ1B
_M_TRQ1C
_M_TRQ1D
_M_TRQ2A
_M_TRQ2B
_M_TRQ2C
_M_TRQ2D
_M_TRQ3A
_M_TRQ3B
_M_TRQ3C
_M_TRQ3D
_M_TRQ4A
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
Message tag for q_ functions
reserved
Graphics input queue 1
Graphics input queue 1
Graphics input queue 1
Graphics input queue 1
Graphics input queue 2
Graphics input queue 2
Graphics input queue 2
Graphics input queue 2
Graphics input queue 3
Graphics input queue 3
Graphics input queue 3
Graphics input queue 3
Graphics input queue 4
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
DIVERSE
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-009
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/19
_______________________________________________________________________________________
CROSS REFERENCE
TY
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
TASK
M
M
M
_M_TRQ4B
_M_TRQ4C
_M_TRQ4D
Graphics input queue 4
Graphics input queue 4
Graphics input queue 4
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
GLOBAL
DIVERSE
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
CROSS REFERENCE
date
12/7 /91
page
4-010
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/20
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
MENU SCREEN
M E N U
F1
F2
S10
INIT
1
GRAPH
2
HELP
3
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
rev
MENU SCREEN
date
page
12/7 /91 5.001-001
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/21
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5.001 SCREEN ANIMATION : MENU
OBJECT
TYPE ANIM
SYMBOL/ADDRESS
1
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
SET
1273
F1
TEMPKEL
2
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
SET
FURNACE
DISPLAY
KEY
FOR
HELP
S10
SYSTASK
3
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
VALUE
COLOR
BLINK
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
F2
MIN
MAX
G
TSX
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
ANIMATION SCREENS
date
page
12/7 /91 5.001-002
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/22
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
FURNACE SCREEN
1
START/STOP
HEATING
12
13
14
DATE
TIME
TEMPERATURE
SETPOINT °K
TEMPERATURE 15
2
°C
4
1000
1500
2000
2500
STATUS OF FURNACE
3
F1
F2
STA/STP HEAT
5
6
F3
F4
F5
ALARM ACCEPT MANAG
7
8
9
F6
S10
MENU
10
HELP
11
G
TSX
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
FURNACE SCREEN
date
page
12/7 /91 5.002-001
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/23
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5.002 SCREEN ANIMATION : FURNACE
OBJECT
TYPE ANIM
SYMBOL/ADDRESS
1
SIZE
OUTPUT_T
1
BAND
2
SIZE
INPUT
3
TEMPKEL
3
SIZE
BAM
1
INDBAM
4
BARGRAPH
HATCHED
WHITE
BLUE
RIGHT
TEMPCELS
W10
5
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
TGL
STA_STP
B1
6
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
TGL
7
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
FOR
ALOG
F3
SYSTASK
8
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
TGL
ACK_AL
9
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
FOR
RUNMGR
F5
BKGND
BAR
DIRECTION
VALUE
COLOR
BLINK
FG
BG
YELLOW
DARK_RED
NONE
NONE
FG
BG
RED
DARK_GREY
NONE
NONE
WHITE
BLUR
NONE
NONE
RED
DARK_RED
NONE
NONE
FILE
FG
BG
FURNACE
MIN
MAX
LIM1
LIM2
1000
2500
1500
2000
MIN
MAX
F1
HEAT
B2
MIN
MAX
F2
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
F4
SYSTASK
MIN
MAX
G
TSX
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
ANIMATION SCREENS
date
page
12/7 /91 5.002-002
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/24
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5.002 SCREEN ANIMATION : FURNACE
OBJECT
ANIM TYPE
SYMBOL/ADDRESS
VALUE
COLOR
BLINK
10
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
SET
MENU
F6
DISPLAY
11
ACTION
VALUE
KEY
KEY
FOR
HELP
S10
SYSTASK
12
PAINT
STA_STP
B1
1
DARK_GREEN
DARK_RED
NONE
NONE
0
1
BLACK
DARK_RED
NONE
SLOW
FG
BG
BLACK
LIGHT-GREY
NONE
NONE
FG
BG
LIGHT-GREY
BLUE
NONE
NONE
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
13
PAINT
HEAT
B2
14
SIZE
OUTPUT_T
1
DATETIME
15
FORMAT
SIZE
OUTPUT_N
9999
2
TEMPCELS
W10
0
G
TSX
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
ANIMATION SCREENS
date
page
12/7 /91 5.002-003
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/25
_______________________________________________________________________________________
MESSAGE BOX FILE : FURNACE.BAM
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
.
.
.
.
.
.
Furnace alarm
Furnace heating up
Temperature OK
Temperature fault
Furnace shutdown
Furnace operating
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
rev
ANIMATION SCREENS
date
page
12/7 /91 5.002-004
TSX COMMUNICATION
SYMBOL
ADDRESS
WRITE
PERIOD
TEMPCELS
INDBAM
STA_STP
HEAT
W10
W15
B1
B2
YES
NO
YES
YES
1
1
0.5
0.5
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
rev
TSX COMMUNICATION
date
12/7 /91
page
6-001
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/26
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
MATH AND LOGIC
LIST OF VARIABLES
PROCEDURE
TRIGGER TAG
: keltocel
: SEC1
VARIABLE
HEAT
STA_STP
TEMPCELS
TEMPKEL
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
PLC ADDRESS
B2
B1
W10
rev
MATH AND LOGIC:VARIABLE
date
12/7 /91
page
7-001
MATH AND LOGIC
PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE
TRIGGER TAG
: keltocel
: SEC1
proc keltocel
begin
if HEAT and STA_STP then
if ((TEMPKEL-273)-TEMPCELS) > 0 then
TEMPCELS=TEMPCELS+10
endif
if ((TEMPKEL-273)-TEMPCELS) < 0 then
TEMPCELS=TEMPCELS-10
endif
endif
end
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
G
rev
MATH AND LOGIC:PROCEDURE
date
12/7 /91
page
7-002
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/27
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Alarms control
Background color
: BLUE
Alarm banner
: BAND
Remote acknowledgement : ACK_AL
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
ALARM
date
12/7 /91
page
8-001
TSX
Alarm definition message
SYMBOL
ADDRESS
VAR1
VAR2
GROUP
TEMPCELS
TEMPCELS
W10
FURNACE 1
NO >
2250
Furnace temperature too high
10
T= %u °C
NO
TEMPCELS
TEMPCELS
W10
FURNACE 1
NO <
1250
Furnace temperature too low
10
T= %u °C
NO
VAR3
PRIOR
MAS CON LIMIT
BAND
MO STATUS
MESSAGE
OFB
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
ALARM
date
12/7 /91
page
8-002
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/28
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Alarm screen control
SYMBOL
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
CONTROL KEY
ACTION
UP
PUP
DWN
PDN
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
SUP
PGUP
SDN
PGDN
HELP
GROUP
SORT
BANNER
PRINT
TOPDIAG
GRAPH
RUNMGR
ACK
CLEAR
rev
ALARM
date
12/7 /91
page
8-003
TSX
Alarm display
SCRFIELD
MESSAGE
FCLR
ADDRESS
BCLR
ADDRESS
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
L10
L11
L12
L13
L14
DATE
TIME
GROUPSEL
SORTSEL
BANRSEL
BANNER
PRINTSEL
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
G
rev
ALARM
date
12/7 /91
page
8-004
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/29
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Information about alarm groups
GROUP
PREC
IFC
IBC
IBL ACK AUD AFC ABC ABL UFC UBC UBL PLO DLO
FURNACE
2
YEL
RED
YES YES YES YEL RED NO
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
BLA RED NO
rev
ALARM
date
12/7 /91
NO
NO
page
8-005
TIMER
SYMBOL
HOURS
SEC1
MINUTES
SECONDS
1
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
TIMER
date
12/7 /91
page
9-001
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/30
Monitoring the temperature of a furnace
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
help
ITEM 1
HELP TASK DOCUMENTATION
..menu
;;Menu COMMENT
This represents the opening screen message :
- F1 -
Initialize INIT
- F2 -
Display \GRAPH\ or the \furnace\ diagram
- S10 - Help with operation
ITEM 2
HELP TASK DOCUMENTATION
..furnace
==graph
;;GRAPH comment
This represents the screen which monitors the furnace and enables :
- F1 -
Start or shutdown furnace
- F2 -
Authorise or not heating of the furnace
- F3 -
Launch the alarm screen
- F4 -
Remote acknowledgement of alarms
- F5 -
Return to the Run-time manager screen
- F6 -
Launch the \menu\ screen
- S10 - Help with operation
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
help
date
12/7 /91
page
10-001
TSX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/31
_______________________________________________________________________________________
help
ITEM 3
DOCUMENTATION TASK HELP
..tempcels
;;Comment ON TEMPCELS alarm
Furnace temperature not found in correct zone
Si T < 1250 deg C : Increase temperature setpoint
Si T > 2250 deg C : Reduce temperature setpoint
Application
MMI : PCM_1
Telemecanique
rev
date
12/7 /91
page
10-002
rev
date
12/7 /91
page
10-003
help
TSX
KEYWORDS REFERENCE TABLE
Keyword
Item
GRAPH
furnace
graph
menu
tempcels
2
2
1
3
Occurences
01
01
01
G
Application
MMI : PCM_1
TSX Telemecanique
help
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/32
______________________________________________________
Contents part H
___________________________________________________________________________
Section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
On-line help
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.1
1.2
Introduction
Review of help screens
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
PL7-MMI 37 files and list of predefined variables
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
2/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.1
2.2
Application files
List of predefined variables
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3
Communication performance
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
3/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Calculating the performance
3.3 Types of variables exchanged between the module and the processor
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4
Sequence of screens
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
4/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
4.1 Sequence of screens using ANT
4.2 Printing graphic screens from a CCX
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5
Questions/Answers
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
5/1
_______________________________________________________________________________
5.1 Questions/Answers concerning the application program
5.2 Questions/Answers concerning the start/run phase
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
6
Index
_________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
H/1
H
___________________________________________________________________________
H
___________________________________________________________________________
H/2
______________________________________________________
On-line Help
Section 1
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.1
Introduction
1/2
_________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Review of Help screens
1/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
1/4
___________________________________________________________________________
1/1
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
On-line help for PL7-MMI 37 software uses QuickHelp to provide a help screen for each
screen or dialog box in PL7-MMI 37 software. For more information on QuickHelp, refer
to the XTEL-BASE manual.
Accessing the Help function from a PL7-MMI 37 screen displays the associated on-line
documentation. It is then possible to move through all the documentation screens using
keywords or via the pulldown menus.
<F1> or Help
This accesses on-line help. The Help screen for the current PL7MMI 37 screen is displayed.
<X>
This is used to return to the current PL7-MMI 37 screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Review of Help screens
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Each Help screen consists of three main parts :
• An action bar at the top of the screen, used to access the pulldown menus.
• A user zone which displays explanatory text on the associated PL7-MMI 37 screen.
• A vertical scroll bar, located on the right of the screen, for scrolling through the text on
the screen.
Action bar
Each of the six items on the action bar gives access to a pulldown menu. To select an
item, either the mouse can be used or the first letter is entered on the keyboard (e.g. F
for File).
File
View
Categories
References
Paste
Options
H
This is used to print a Help screen, to quit on-line help, etc.
This is used to look for a screen, access the next or the preceding
screen, to find out the screen sequencing log, etc.
Accesses the list of screens. Selecting a screen in the list displays that
screen.
This gives the list of keywords for the Help screen displayed. Selecting a keyword, accesses the corresponding screen.
This is used to save the current window or current screen to a paste
file (paste.qh by default).
This is used to modify the window size and the paste mode. (The data
saved by the paste command is added or overwritten.)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/2
On-line Help
1
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Text zone
A Help screen always starts with a title (green underlined in white on a color screen)
which defines it. This title is as similar as possible to that of the screen name which
appears in a border in the bottom section.
The remainder of the text zone is subdivided into areas, each one starting with a subtitle (red on a color screen). Each area deals with a different topic covering a general
description and possible actions to take. It may be divided into sub-areas (shown by
a red asterisk on a color screen).
Keywords used for directly accessing the corresponding Help screen are highlighted (in
white on a color screen).
Words displayed in green on a color screen are the most important words in the text, after
the title.
Scroll bar
As its name implies, this is used together with a mouse to scroll the text on the screen.
The up and down arrow keys on the keyboard can also be used for this purpose.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1/4
______________________________________________________
PL7-MMI 37 files and list of predefined variables
Section 2
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.1
Application files
2/2
_________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
List of predefined variables
2/3
_________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
2/4
___________________________________________________________________________
2/1
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1 Application files
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PL7-MMI 37 files are given a name of up to 8 characters, followed by an extension of
3 characters indicating the type of file.
The PL7-MMI 37 software files are arranged in various sub-directories of the Software
Workshop.
Application files are arranged at Station level, under the MMI sub-directory :
MMI
APPLI
DOP_1
MMI.BIN
MMI.ADD
Binary file
Work file used to create MMI.BIN file
CT
xxx.CT
Configuration table
PCT
xxx.PCT
Configuration table (work file)
PIC
xxx.PIC
xxx.PCC
xxx.SLC
Bitmap image created by the GED
Compressed xxx.PIC file
List of symbols used in the xxx.
PIC file
BAM
xxx.xxx
File of messages used for message
box type animations
PROCS
xxx.
Procedures for the MATH AND LOGIC task
ANT
xxx.ANT
Animations atttached to a screen (1 file
per screen)
BACKUP
xxx.x
Files obtained by downloading the communication
module or backing up the application
KEY
GRAPH.KEY List of animated screens
xxx.KEY
Name and position of animated objects on
the screen. 1 file per screen
DOC
xxx.AND
xxx.IPI
Printable file describing the animations
Graphic printable file for "embedded" drawings
xxx.DOC
Printable file describing the CM tables
xxx.HYP
Help task files (optional)
HYP
SARTTAPP. BAT
GRAPH.CNF
xxx.CDB
xxx.CDX
ACLIST
CTLIST
DPLIST
DCLIST
DOP_2
DOP_3
DOP_4
H
File for starting the communication module application
File for configuring the graph task
Database. Source form for CM and ANT tables
List of configurable CM tasks
List of CT's to be generated during a "Create tables" process
List generated by "Select tasks"
List of programs for formatting the documentation
Same files for module 2
Same files for module 3
Same files for module 4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/2
PL7-MMI 37 files and list of predefined variables
2
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.2 List of predefined variables
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Type
Name
R/W Description
Analog
ALACTIVE
R
Number of alarms displayed using ALOG
Analog
A_DAY
R
Day value (eg : 12/10/92 => A_DAY = 12)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Analog
A_DOW
R
Day number in the week (eg : Tues => A_DOW = 3)
Analog
A_DOY
R
Day number in the year (eg : 02/02 => A_DOY = 33)
Analog
A_HOUR
R
Analog
A_FAS_STAT R
Refer to DIAGFAS manual
Analog
A_MIN
R
Minutes value (eg : 15:43:05 => A_MIN = 43)
Analog
A_MONTH
R
Months value (eg : 12/10/92 => A_MONTH = 10)
Analog
A_SEC
R
Seconds value (eg : 15:43:05 => A_SEC = 5)
Analog
A_YEAR
R
Year value (eg : 12/10/92 => A_YEAR = 1992)
Analog
TASK1
...
TASK14
R
Status of task 1 (1st task after RUNMGR)
0 : inactive, 1 : active
Status of task 14 (14th task after RUNMGR)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Time value (eg : 15:43:05 => A_HOUR =15)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
R
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Digital
ALOGMASK R/W Monitoring of alarms declared possible to mask
1 (default) alarms masked
0 alarms not masked
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Digital
PRTSCR
Digital
SHUTDOWN R
W
Controls screen printing
Digital
SHUTREQ
W
Request to stop application
Digital
TSX_AUD
R
Association of audible alarm bits declared using ALOG
R
Day of the week and date (in French format
only
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Application is currently stopped
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message DATE
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message DATETIME
R
Concatenation of DATE and TIME variables
Message DISPLAY
W
Use to select active screen under GRAPH
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message DISPLAY1
R
Name of current active screen under GRAPH
Message M_DOY
R
Day of the year (eg : 02/02 => M_DOY = "033")
Message M_SETDAT
R/W Used to update the system date (DATE format)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message M_SETTIME R/W Used to update the system time (TIME format)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message M_YYDOY
R
Formatted date (eg : 12/10/92 => M_YYDOY = "92283"
Message M_YYMMDD R
Formatted date (eg : 12/10/92 =>M_YYMMDD = "921012"
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message SYSERROR R/W System error message (displayed under RUNMGR)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message TASK1M
...
TASK14M
R/W Task 1 status message (1st task after RUNMGR)
Message TIME
R
R/W Task 14 status message (14th task after RUNMGR)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
System time ("HH:MM:SS")
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/3
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Type
Name
R/W Description
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message TASK1M
...
TASK14M
R/W Task 1 status message (1st task after RUNMGR)
R/W Task 14 status message (14th task after RUNMGR)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Message TIME
R
Time system ("HH:MM:SS")
Message TSXDIAG
W
Alarm used to start DIAG
Message TSXDIAG2
W
Refer to DIAGFAS manual
Message TSXFAS
W
Refer to DIAGFAS manual
Message _FGPERM
R
Name of the active task (eg : "ALOG", "GRAPH",etc)
Message _FGPREV
R
Name of the previous active task (eg : "ALOG, etc)
Message _FGREQ
W
Used to select the active task
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Note
There are other preset variables, but they cannot be used by the application, such
as the SYNC94 to SYNC99 variables.
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2/4
______________________________________________________
Communication performance
Section 3
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.1
Introduction
3/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.2
Calculating the performance
3/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.2-1 Method
3/3
_______________________________________________________________________________
3.2-2 Charts
3/4
_______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
Types of variables exchanged between the module and the processor 3/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
3/6
___________________________________________________________________________
3/1
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.1 Introduction
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The OFB used for communication with the TSX PCM 27/37 communication module
consumes a maximum time in the master task cycle which is fixed for each type of
processor
•
•
•
•
•
TSX 47 xxx
TSX 67 xx0
TSX 67 xx5
TSX 87 xxx
TSX 107 xxx
20 ms per cycle,
20 ms per cycle,
15 ms per cycle,
15 ms per cycle,
10 ms per cycle.
Whatever the number, type or division into read periods of the communication variables,
the effect on the master task cycle is limited to these values. Therefore processing of the
OFB can be spread over several cycles.
This principle determines the maximum number of objects exchanged, depending
on the lowest read period used.
If this maximum is exceeded, the exchange period is no longer respected, but there
is no other problem.
For example :
Using the TSX 107 xxx PLC (master task cycle time = 100 ms) and 0.5 s variables in the
MONITOR 37 application, the OFB will have 500 ms / 100 ms, or 5 cycles to perform its
monitoring work and send its variables.
These 5 cycles represent a maximum work time of 5 x 10 = 50 ms.
If the same application did NOT use 0.5 s variables but used 1 s variables, the number
of cycles used would be 1000 ms / 100 ms, or 10 cycles. As the OFB has more time
available (10 x 10 = 100 ms), it can exchange more variables.
In the same way, if 2 s variables were used, the OFB would have 20 cycles available,
and so on.
Thus it is possible to calculate the exchange rate, depending on :
• the type of processor,
• the number and type of communication variables,
• the number of cycles available to the OFB in the period (= K).
To help with the calculation of the exchange rate, refer to the charts on the following
pages (a chart for each type of processor).
Note
It is advisable not to use 0.5 s variables with TSX PMX 47 xxx or TSX PMX 67 xx0 PLCs, as this
may lead to incorrect communication.
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/2
Communication performance
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.2
Calculating the performance
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.2-1 Method
Operations
Example
1. Calculate K according to the shortest period used in Min. read period : 0.5 s
MAST task period : 70 ms
the application.
K = integer part (500/70) = 7
2. Calculate the number of bit type and word type X = 100 I/Oxy,i + 41 Bi + Ixy,S,
objects in the MONITOR 37 application (refer to or 150 bits
section 3.3, to determine the impact of each object). Y = 200 Wi + 50 word bits, or
250 words
3. Consult the chart which corresponds to the type of CPU type : TSX 87 xxx
processor used.
4. If the point determined by the number of words and K = 7, TSX 87, X = 150, Y = 250
bits is located BELOW the curve shown by the K
calculation :
=> Communication will be at the required rate.
5. If the point determined by the number of words and K = 7, TSX 87, X = 210, Y = 300
bits is located ABOVE the curve shown by the K
calculation :
=> Communication may not be at the required rate.
There are several possibilities :
• Do not use 0.5 s variables in the application. The K = INT (1000/80) = 12, TSX 87,
method can then be used to re-calculate K (1 s, 2 s, etc, X = 210, Y = 300
variables).
• Reduce the master task period. The method can then K = INT (500/60) = 8, TSX 87,
X = 210, Y = 300
be used to re-calculate K.
• Respecting the period is not important, the K = 7, TSX 87, X = 210, Y = 300
application can operate in this state. The "rate not
respected" bit is set to 1 in the OFB status word. The
variables are updated as well as is possible.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/3
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.2-2 Charts
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/4
Communication performance
3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/5
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.3 Types of variables exchanged between the module and the processor
_______________________________________________________________________________________
TSX object RTDB type
Access Size
Description
Com impact
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Bi
Digital
R/W
1 bit
Internal bit
1 bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
SYi
Digital
R/W
1 bit
System bit
1 bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Wi
Analog
R/W
16 bits Internal word
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
CWi
Analog
R
16 bits Constant words
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
SWi
Analog
R/W
16 bits System word
1 bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
DWi
2
Floating point R/W
32 bits Double internal word
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
CDWi 2
Floating point R
32 bits Double constant word
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Wi,j
Digital
R
1 bit
Internal word bit
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
CWi,j
Digital
R
1 bit
Constant word bit
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Oxy,i
Digital
R/W
1 bit
Discrete module output bit
1 bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Ixy,i
Digital
R
1 bit
Discrete module input bit
1 bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Ixy,S
Digital
R
1 bit
Module default bit
3 bits
___________________________________________________________________________________________
OFBi,b
Digital
R/W 1 1 bit
OFB bit
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
OFBi,w
Analog
R/W 1 16 bits OFB word
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
OFBi,dw
Floating point R/W 1 32 bits OFB double word
1 word
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Xi
Digital
R
1 bit
Step bit
1 bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
XMj
Digital
R
1 bit
Macro-step bit
1 bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
XMj,i
Digital
R
1 bit
Macro-step step bit
1 bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
XMj,I
Digital
R
1 bit
Macro-step input step
1 bit
bit
___________________________________________________________________________________________
XMj,O
Digital
R
1 bit
Macro-step output step
bit
1 bit
1 Can be written to if authorized by the designer of the OFB.
2 These double words enable the exchange of decimal or floating point values,
according to the type of variable defined under XTEL-SDBASE.
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3/6
______________________________________________________
Sequence of screens
Section 4
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.1
ANT
_
_________________Sequence
_____________________________of
_______screens
_______________________using
_________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________4/2
______
4.2
Printing graphic screens from a CCX
4/3
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
4/4
___________________________________________________________________________
4/1
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.1 Sequence of screens using ANT
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The screen displayed is the one whose name is written in the variable DISPLAY1. A
change of screen can be requested
• by the operator via a function key or a text entry using the keyboard
• automatically, by an event in the PL7-3 application or the operator dialog application.
The screen displayed can be :
• an application screen, whose name is defined by the designer
• a system screen, whose name is predefined. This name is always entered in upper
case letters (ALOG, RUNMGR, DIAG, etc).
Example of programming the call up of an application screen.
A Function Key type animation is
used with the SET action.
Example of programming the call up of a system screen.
A Function Key type animation is
used with the FOR action.
The variable TASK is a temporary
variable, local to the operator dialog
application.
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/2
Linking the screens
4
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4.2
Printing graphic screens from a CCX
_______________________________________________________________________________________
It is possible to print graphic pages from a CCX or PC. Printing is triggered by changing
the status of the PRTSCR reserved variable.
This can be controlled by a function key as shown in the example below
or by a PLC variable.
In this case, the user must :
• Define in Sdbase :
Variable
Symbol
B1
PRTSCR
• Add the PRTSCR symbol to the communication table under CM, at the required period.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/3
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4/4
______________________________________________________
Questions/Answers
Section 5
___________________________________________________________________________
Sub-section
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.1
Questions/Answers concerning the application program
5/2
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.2
Questions/Answers concerning the start/run phase
5/6
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This section ends at page
5/10
WARNING
• These Questions/Answers are deliberately presented in no logical order. For an
explanation of the development process refer to section 2.1 - Method for creating an
operator dialog application.
• The answers given apply to products :
TXT L PL7 M37 V43 version ≥ V2.0, or TXT L PL7 M37 V5/V52
___________________________________________________________________________
5/1
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5.1 Questions/Answers concerning the application program
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Why will the GED editor not start under PL7-MMI 37 ?
The Telemecanique version of OS/2 must be V1.1 II12 or above. (refer to page 1/3, 1.2
Configuration required for PL7-MMI 37).
_____________________________________________________________________
Can ALARM task acknowledgment data be sent to the PLC processor ?
It is possible to define a MONITOR 37 database variable (binary or PL7) which will be
set to one each time the ACK key is pressed. This variable is reset to zero by the
application (refer to page E1/4, 1.2 Configuration table for controlling alarms).
_____________________________________________________________________
Are there predefined variables in a PL7-MMI 37 application ?
There are a certain number of predefined variables which can be used by the PL7-MMI 37
application (DISPLAY1, etc) (refer to page H2/3, 2.2 List of predefined variables).
__________________________________________________________________________
Can the screen and/or the task be changed from the MATH and LOGIC task ?
It is possible to change :
• the graphic screen using the variable DISPLAY1,
• the task (ALOG, RUNMGR, etc) using the variable _FGREQ.
Example
DISPLAY1 = "SCREEN2" changes the screen to SCREEN2,
_FGREQ = "ALOG" changes the screen to the ALARMS task screen.
(refer to page H2/3, 2.2 List of predefined variables).
_____________________________________________________________________
Can character strings be transferred between the PLC application and the
MONITOR 37 application ?
It is possible to transfer character strings via the MATH and LOGIC task using PLC
words. Character strings can be constructed/disassembled using manipulation
instructions (CHR, SUBSTR, etc). It is therefore possible to "store" one or two ASCII
codes per PLC word. (refer to page F1/30, Functions on strings of characters).
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/2
Questions/Answers
5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
How do you print using MONITOR 37 ?
Printing is only possible using the ALARMS task. It is possible to declare a fault to be
printed (by its group). Note that values can be incorporated (process variables, etc) in
the alarm message (refer to page E1/11, 1.2 Alarm definition table - Message).
The default configuration parameters for the COM1 serial port on the module are as
follows : 2400 bps, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit.
On the other hand, if the operator dialog machine is a CCX 57 or 77, or a PC compatible
microcomputer, the screen prints can be accessed directly (see Section 4.2 in this
manual and the TSX DM 37 RT1 V52 M manual).
Example
"End of station %d : Quantity : %d Kg" in an alarm message would cause "End of
station 1 : Quantity : 5 Kg" to appear, if the fields Variable 1 and Variable 2 are
completed.
_____________________________________________________________________
How do you clear an application ?
A PL7-MMI 37 application can be completely cleared using the Reinitialize function
(Utilities Menu on the main screen). This operation clears the application from the
module being used (refer to page C2/3, 2.3 Clearing an application).
_____________________________________________________________________
How do you display PLC scaled values ?
Scaling is performed using a scaling procedure in the MATH and LOGIC task.
Example
RES is the floating point variable displayed as a digital output,
#W100 is the PLC word to be displayed.
To show a result in decimal format, write in a MATH and LOGIC task procedure :
RES = #W100/10
_____________________________________________________________________
Opening the CM or ANT displays the error message : "Unable to open OBJECT XREF
or TYPE".
The application is in PL7-MMI 37 V2.5 format and cannot be read by your version of
PL7-MMI 37. Install PL7-MMI 37 version 2.5 or later.
_____________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/3
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Under what conditions can the "fast text" function be used and what precautions
should be taken ?
"Fast text" is a new function provided for Text Output and Message Box type animations,
from PL7-MMI 37 version V2.0 upwards. It considerably improves the display performance
of these animations.
The animation is positioned on an 8 pixel matrix rather than at pixel level.
An animation with fast text is processed in the screen display cycle. It does not therefore
take priority over other animations.
These ideas must be incorporated before the "fast text" function is used. In fact, the
positioning at the 8 pixel level governs the design of the screen.
Method for positioning screen animations using the "fast text" function :
• Using GED : use a grid representing the matrix of possible positions for characters.
To do this :
1 Access GED and display a blank screen
2 Display the grid, using the "retrieve screen" function, which is accessed using the
SYMBOL icon. To do this, load the GRID8X8.CUT file (refer to section 2.10 in
divider A)
3 Position the drawings, text, frames, etc, in the screens. Warning : use different
colors than that of the grid for this, or, if required, change the color of the grid
4 Remove the grid by changing it to the background color (refer to section 2.22 in
divider A)
• Using ANT : use the positioning data shown by the line/column cursor.
Example : screen using GED before "removal" of the grid
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/4
Questions/Answers
5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
What is the XTEL V52 "Purge" function used for on MMI applications?
This function :
• deletes the files downloaded by transferring to the Backup directories,
• deletes all the files generated by the "Application Documentation" function.
_____________________________________________________________________
Can 640 x 350 screens be converted to 640 x 480 screens and vice versa ?
• Converting from 640 x 350 to 640 x 480 :
- Define the 640 x 480 application in the "Utilities / Application selection" menu, and
start the GED editor.
- Open the drawing to be converted. After confirmation, the file is converted to
640 x 480 by adding 130 lines at the bottom of the screen.
• Converting from 640 x 480 to 640 x 350 :
This conversion is only possible by removing the 130 lines at the bottom of the screen.
Therefore :
- Load the screen using the GED editor.
- Create a symbol from this screen and exit the GED editor.
- Modify the definition of the "Utilities / Application selection" screen.
- Using the GED editor, load the symbol previously created.
- Save the screen.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/5
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5.2 Questions/Answers concerning the start/run phase
_______________________________________________________________________________________
• If the target machine is a CCX, refer to the TSX LM37 RT1 manual.
Why does the DOS prompt (A:>) appear when the TSX PCM 27/37 module is
re-initialized ?
The DOS prompt appears if the cartridge is formatted as a System Cartridge. The
TSX PCM 27/37 module fitted with this cartridge boots with it and ignores its system disk.
This formatting is reserved for future OEM applications and will not take a MONITOR 37
application. To exit from it :
• With a TSX RxM 512-16 cartridge
- remove the cartridge,
- reinitialize the TSX PCM 27/37 cartridge,
- wait for the screen "PCM 27/37 - Main menu",
- replace the cartridge and switch it back on,
- reformat the cartridge as a user cartridge : "User Cartridge" (for a TSX PCM 27/37
version ≤ V1.1 cartridge) or "Monitor 37 Cartridge" (for a TSX PCM 27/37 version
≥ V1.2 cartridge).
• With a TSX RxM 1024-16 cartridge
- on the keyboard connected to the TSX PCM 27/37 module enter :
A:
<Enter>,
cd \doptools
<Enter>,
startuti
<Enter>,
- reformat the cartridge as a user cartridge : "Monitor 37 Cartridge".
Note
Only "User Cartridge" cartridges can be formatted from PL7-MMI 37.
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/6
5
Questions/Answers
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Why can the MONITOR 37 application not be loaded into the TSX PCM 27/37
module ?
Message "Connection or TSX configuration fault",
Message "Module not configured or not ready or faulty",
Message "Module configuration fault".
Four situations can cause one of these messages to appear :
• The physical link between the development station and the PLC processor is not
operational. The connections and/or the station addresses must be checked. A simple
way to check that the physical link has been established with the processor is to start
the XTEL-CONTROL station tool.
• The TSX PCM 27/37 module is not in the correct location in the configuration under
XTEL-CONF. Has the correct code been used ? (different codes for TSX PCM 27 and
TSX PCM 37).
• The location declared using PL7-MMI 37 for the module being used is incorrect.
• The TSX PCM 27/37 module is not waiting for a transfer :
- the module is using DOS (see previous question/answer),
- the MONITOR 37 application is running and the TENFT control task is not active (in
this case stop the application using RUNMGR before trying to transfer again).
Why can the MONITOR 37 application not be loaded into the CCX ?
• Check the link between XTEL and a network PLC (proceed as in the first situation of
the previous question).
• Check that the "DRIVER MISSING or INVALID" message has not appeared on the
CCX.
• Check the link between the CCX and a network PLC, and proceed as follows : - on the
CCX and under DOS, enter the command "M37 DEBUG NN.SS".
• Check that MONITOR 37 is not waiting for a transfer (proceed as in the fourth situation
of the previous question).
Message "No more space on the cartridge or the disk".
• The TSX RxM xxx-16 cartridge is full. In this case it may be helpful to reformat the
cartridge. As existing files are not destroyed by a new transfer, there may be an
accumulation if several modifications have been made to the application.
• If the problem persists, a larger size cartridge must be used or certain tasks must not
be transferred.
Message "Disk access error".
The TSX RxM xxx-16 cartridge is missing or defective. An attempt may be made to
reformat the cartridge. If this is unsuccessful change the cartridge.
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/7
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Why does the MONITOR 37 application freeze during the INITOFB phase ?
Processor <-> TSX PCM 27/37 module communication is initialized during this phase. There
are several coherence checks which can only be performed at this stage, which may
lead to the appearance of a number of messages :
Message "Insufficient MMI data space",
Message "Application memory reservation failure".
The space allocated to the MONITOR 37 application in the .APP file in the PLC
processor is insufficient. It is necessary to :
• reintegrate the MMI.BIN file in the .APP file (XTEL-MEM station tool),
• transfer the .APP file again to the PLC processor (XTEL-TRANSFER station tool).
Message "Access to a non-configured OFB : xyyy",
Message "PL7-3 outside limit : xyyy",
Message "Read of discrete module missing : xyyy".
The MONITOR 37 application is trying to access a variable which is missing from the
PL7-3 configuration.
x = type of variable (Binary, Analog, Floating point or Message),
yyy = index of the variable (displayed in the Index of the OBJECTS database).
Example
• variable #W2000 used under PL7-MMI 37 when only 1000 internal words have been
declared in PL7-3,
• use of a PID number 14 in a display, when only 10 PIDs have been declared in PL7-3,
• variable I4,0 used under PL7-MMI 37 when module 04 has not been declared in the
PL7-3 configuration.
Message "PL7 type unknown : xyyy".
A variable of an unauthorized type has been entered (refer to page A4/12, 4.7-2 Types
of variables exchanged between the module and the processor).
Message "MMI OFB not configured".
The MMI OFB has not been configured under PL7-3 or the number of occurrences
defined is not sufficient (refer to page A4/14, 4.7-4 OFB Configuration).
Message "MMI OFB version incompatible".
The MMI OFB configured under PL7-3 is not compatible with the version of the
communication task used. Change the MMI OFB for a new version : several versions
can co-exist on the X-TEL station (refer to page A4/14, 4.7-4 OFB Configuration).
Message "Problem with Mirror request".
Check that the TSX PCM module has been correctly declared in the PL7-3 configuration.
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/8
Questions/Answers
5
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Why can some tasks not be started ?
It may not be possible to start some tasks and/or error messages may be displayed when
the MONITOR 37 application is initialized.
Message ".... Files not found",
Message " Impossible to open xxxx.CT",
Message "No link with new screen".
These messages appear when files have not been transferred to the TSX PCM 27/37
module. To clear these messages, the create/transfer procedure must be followed
carefully :
• create the tables,
• select the tasks,
• transfer.
It is essential that the procedures are performed in this order.
If the problem persists, it may be helpful to try to reformat the cartridge and repeat the
create/transfer procedure.
Message "Insufficient memory".
This message appears when the space allocated to a task is not sufficient for the
processing it has to perform.
This space can be modified under CM (SYSTEM CONFIGURATION). If the configuration
is modified in any way, the application must be transferred again (refer to page
A4/16, 4.8-1 Configuration table for the system - Database [Kb]).
If this message appears for the MATH and LOGIC task, a message "Capacity
exceeded", followed by an indication of the capacity will have been displayed during
TABLE CREATION.
Message "Invalid Operand".
This message indicates that an operation with invalid operands has been performed in
the MATH and LOGIC task. It appears when the operation is performed.
The following situations may cause this message to be displayed :
• division by 0. Warning : when the TSX PCM 27/37 is initialized all the variables have
the value 0,
• table index out of limits,
• sub-function (CALL) called up when the procedure called does not have a trigger.
Message "The station address defined under XTEL is incorrect".
This message indicates that the requests to the PLC have not been answered.
Carry out the following :
• Check that the PLC has the right address.
• Check that the link between the CCX and the PLC is correct (under DOS, use the
command "M37 DEBUG NN.SS").
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/9
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Why do certain floating point variables display exclamation marks (!!!!!) instead of their
value?
Check in the XTEL-SDBASE that the variable's Display field indicates the format F. If
it does not, enter the letter F in this field to declare the variable as floating point and to
take account of this in the PL7-MMI 37 application.
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5/10
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
%c ...............................................................................................
%d ...............................................................................................
%f ................................................................................................
%ld ..............................................................................................
%o ...............................................................................................
%s ...............................................................................................
%u ...............................................................................................
%X ..............................................................................................
%x ...............................................................................................
E1/13
E1/13
E1/13
E1/13
E1/13
E1/13
E1/13
E1/13
E1/13
abandoning the symbol library management function ................
abbreviations for days of the week and months .........................
ABS .............................................................................................
accented characters ...................................................................
access right .................................................................................
access to the communication module selection screen ..............
ACK ............................................................................................
acknowledgment of alarms .........................................................
action associated with a key on the display console ..................
action bar ....................................................................................
active task ...................................................................................
ADD ............................................................................................
adding a file to the list .................................................................
adding an option .........................................................................
alarm acknowledgment variable .................................................
alarm band (banner) ...................................................................
alarm conditions ..........................................................................
alarm displayed by default in the alarm band .............................
alarm message ...........................................................................
alarm status attribute ..................................................................
alarm status ................................................................................
alarms control .............................................................................
alarms display .............................................................................
ALLTRIM .....................................................................................
ALOG ..........................................................................................
ALOG task ..................................................................................
alternative icon ............................................................................
ANALOG .....................................................................................
anchorage point ..........................................................................
AND ............................................................................................
Animate menu in animation editor ..............................................
A3/34
D1/8
F1/28
A2/13
1/4
C2/3
E1/16
E1/8
A3/25
H1/2
A4/22
A3/24, A3/25
B1/8
C2/4
E1/5
E1/4, E2/3
E1/11
E1/6
E1/13
E1/9
E1/13
E1/4
E1/15
F1/30
A3/24, A4/18
E2/2
A2/12
A3/29
A2/22 - A2/24
F1/21
A3/4
A
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/1
H
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
animation name .......................................................................... A3/9,A3/12,
A3/15,A3/18,
A3/22,A3/24,
A3/27
ANT ............................................................................................. A3/5
application comment ................................................................... 3/3
application documentation .......................................................... C2/6
application files ........................................................................... H2/2
archiving alarms .......................................................................... E1/9
ARGCNT ..................................................................................... F1/32
arithmetic operator ...................................................................... F1/19
ASC ............................................................................................ F1/30
ASCII .......................................................................................... C2/8
ASCII which cannot be printed ................................................... F1/13
assigning a value to a variable ................................................... F1/34
«Audio» bit .................................................................................. E1/8
available conventional memory .................................................. A4/22
available options ......................................................................... C2/4
available paged memory ............................................................. A4/22
available space in the cartridge .................................................. B2/4
B
background color of alarm screens .............................................
background color of displayed characters ..................................
backing up the application ..........................................................
.BAM file .....................................................................................
BANNER .....................................................................................
BANRSEL ...................................................................................
bargraph - solid ...........................................................................
bargraph - split ............................................................................
bargraph .....................................................................................
bargraph color .............................................................................
bargraph limits ............................................................................
bargraph variable ........................................................................
BEGIN .........................................................................................
bit to bit logic operator ................................................................
bitmap .........................................................................................
blinking attributes ........................................................................
boolean .......................................................................................
«bootable» cartridge ...................................................................
bytes already transferred ............................................................
H
E1/4
A3/22
B2/3, B2/7
A3/27
E1/16, E1/17
E1/17
A3/12
A3/12
A3/11
A3/13
A3/12, A3/13
A3/12
F1/15, F1/17
F1/22
A1/2, A3/7
A3/9, A3/19
F1/20
B1/6
B2/10
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/2
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
C
CALL ........................................................................................... F1/17
call procedure ............................................................................. F1/7
cancelling printing ....................................................................... C2/13
cartridge programmer ................................................................. 1/3
changing the background color ................................................... A2/6
changing the color of a pixel ....................................................... A2/9
changing the color palette ........................................................... A2/36
changing the screen : SET function key ..................................... A3/25, G1/22,
G1/25
changing the task : FOR function key ......................................... A3/24, A3/25,
G1/22, G1/24
character fonts ............................................................................ A2/12
character size ............................................................................. A2/12,A3/16,
A3/21,A3/22,
A3/27
character string value ................................................................. F1/13
characters - generic - $ and * ..................................................... A3/34
characters - IBM ......................................................................... C2/8
characters permitted for entering variables ................................ A3/30
CHR ............................................................................................ F1/30
CLEAR ........................................................................................ E1/16
clearing an application ................................................................ C2/3
clearing the screen ..................................................................... A2/6
CM .............................................................................................. A4/4
coherence ................................................................................... C2/16
coherence of the date ................................................................. D1/7
color change limits ...................................................................... A3/13, A3/19
color of displayed characters ...................................................... A3/22
color palette ................................................................................ A2/5,A3/15,
A3/16,A3/18,
A3/19,A3/27
colored background .................................................................... A2/19
coloring a drawing area .............................................................. A2/19
colors for acknowledged alarms ................................................. E1/8
colors for non-acknowledged alarms .......................................... E1/9
color of the drawing .................................................................... A2/5
comment in a procedure ............................................................. F1/33
comparing the application ........................................................... B2/8
conditions for transfer to the module .......................................... B2/7
Configuration Manager CM ......................................................... A4/3
configuration of the key band ...................................................... E1/5
configuration of the MMI OFB ..................................................... A4/14
configuration table for the system ............................................... A4/17
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/3
H
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
confirmation of connection to the module ...................................
connecting operator consoles .....................................................
connection cable .........................................................................
CONST .......................................................................................
contents of the dossier ................................................................
contents of the file to print ...........................................................
continuous printing ......................................................................
Control menu in main screen ......................................................
control of the alarm screens .......................................................
controlling the module .................................................................
copy animation parameters for an object to a register ................
copy part of the screen ...............................................................
copy/cut lines ..............................................................................
copying the diskettes ..................................................................
COS ............................................................................................
CPU acknowledgment variable ...................................................
Create menu in main screen .......................................................
creating a local cartridge .............................................................
creating a symbol ........................................................................
creating and reading a PL7 type animated symbol .....................
creating tables to be transferred to the module ..........................
creating tables with coherence ...................................................
creating the documentation dossier ............................................
.CRT file ......................................................................................
cursor ..........................................................................................
C1/3
3/3
1/3
F1/12
C2/7
C2/12
E1/9
3/5
E1/15
C1/2
A3/6
A2/15
A4/19, D1/2,
E1/2, F1/3
A4/19, D1/2,
E1/2, F1/3
1/4
F1/28
E1/6
3/4
B2/3
A3/33
A3/34
B1/3
B1/3
C2/7
C2/11
A2/5
database .....................................................................................
DATE ..........................................................................................
date of formatting the cartridge ...................................................
date the tables were last generated ............................................
DATETIME ..................................................................................
deadband ....................................................................................
declarations in a procedure file ...................................................
DECLARE ...................................................................................
default alarm sort option .............................................................
default printing of alarms ............................................................
defining the alarms .....................................................................
defining the date of an event ......................................................
defining the graphic screens in an application ............................
defining the password .................................................................
A4/8
E1/17, G1/17
B2/4
3/3
G1/17
E1/12
F1/10
F1/11, F1/17
E1/6
E1/6
E1/10
D1/7
A1/2
B1/4
copy/paste lines ..........................................................................
D
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/4
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
defining the time interval ............................................................. D1/5
deleting a file from the list ........................................................... B1/7
deleting a line in the table ........................................................... A4/19, D1/2,
E1/2, F1/3
deleting a pixel ............................................................................ A2/9
deleting a symbol file .................................................................. A2/17
deleting a variable from the table ................................................ A4/8
deleting all animation on a screen .............................................. A3/5
deleting an animated object under GED ..................................... A2/4
deleting an animated screen ....................................................... A3/3
deleting an animated symbol from the library ............................. A3/34
deleting an object without losing the animation parameters ....... A3/6
deleting animation from an object ............................................... A3/6
deleting the menu ....................................................................... A2/6
description of a page in the dossier ............................................ C2/14
description of the task ................................................................. A4/18
description of the variable ........................................................... A3/30
DIAG ........................................................................................... E1/16
dialog box ................................................................................... 3/2
DIGITAL ...................................................................................... A3/29
direction in which the bargraph moves ....................................... A3/12
direction of writing ....................................................................... A2/12
directive ...................................................................................... F1/16
directory function ........................................................................ F1/29
DISPLAY ..................................................................................... G1/17
DISPLAY1 ................................................................................... G1/17
displaying a module cartridge directory ...................................... B2/9
DIV .............................................................................................. F1/19
documentation listing .................................................................. C2/14
dossier revision date and number ............................................... C2/9, C2/10
downloading an application ........................................................ B2/6
downloading an application to the module .................................. B2/6
DRAG icon .................................................................................. A2/5
drawing a circle ........................................................................... A2/27
drawing a solid circle .................................................................. A2/28
drawing curves ............................................................................ A2/23
drawing ellipses .......................................................................... A2/27
drawing horizontal lines .............................................................. A2/22
drawing oblique lines .................................................................. A2/22
drawing polygons ........................................................................ A2/23
drawing rectangles ...................................................................... A2/30
drawing rectangles in three dimensions ..................................... A2/32
drawing solid circles with a border .............................................. A2/29
drawing solid ellipse with a border .............................................. A2/29
drawing solid ellipses .................................................................. A2/28
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/5
H
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
drawing solid rectangles .............................................................
drawing solid rectangles with a border .......................................
drawing vertical lines ..................................................................
dynamic display of the background color ....................................
dynamic display of the color of characters ..................................
A2/31
A2/31
A2/22
A3/15, A3/18
A3/16, A3/19
Edit menu in animation editor
editing messages ........................................................................
ELSE ...........................................................................................
END ............................................................................................
ENDIF .........................................................................................
entry line .....................................................................................
EQ ...............................................................................................
“erase” function ...........................................................................
erasing a drawing .......................................................................
error file .......................................................................................
event timers ................................................................................
executing the transfer task in the foreground .............................
EXIT ............................................................................................
exiting a sub-menu .....................................................................
exiting PL7-MMI 37 .....................................................................
exiting the animation editor .........................................................
exiting the configuration manager ...............................................
exiting the graphics editor ...........................................................
EXP .............................................................................................
exporting a report ........................................................................
expression ..................................................................................
A3/4
A3/28
F1/16
F1/15, F1/17
F1/16
A2/7
E1/11
A2/20
A2/20
C2/16
D1/2, D1/6
B2/10
F1/32
A2/3
3/5
A3/4, A3/36
A4/4, A4/7
A2/7
F1/28
A4/7
F1/18
File menu in animation editor ......................................................
FIRST .........................................................................................
flags ............................................................................................
FLOAT ........................................................................................
floating point value ......................................................................
footer ...........................................................................................
FOR ............................................................................................
foreground task ...........................................................................
foreground task option ................................................................
format of numbers displayed ......................................................
formatting the cartridge ...............................................................
freehand drawing ........................................................................
front face of the module ..............................................................
FUNACK .....................................................................................
function key .................................................................................
A3/4
E2/4
A4/17
A3/29, F1/11
F1/12
C2/11
A3/24, A3/25
A4/23
A4/18
A3/18
B2/7, C1/3
A2/19
C1/3
E2/4
A3/23
E
F
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/6
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
function key variable ................................................................... A3/24
functions on strings of characters ............................................... F1/30
G
GE ...............................................................................................
GED menu ..................................................................................
Generate menu in main screen ..................................................
generating a report .....................................................................
GETARG .....................................................................................
GETDIR ......................................................................................
GETDRTOP ................................................................................
GFIRST .......................................................................................
GLAS ..........................................................................................
GRAPH
graphics task ...............................................................................
grid default options .....................................................................
GROUP .......................................................................................
group(s) of alarms displayed by default ......................................
grouping operator .......................................................................
groups of alarms .........................................................................
GROUPSEL ................................................................................
GRPACK .....................................................................................
GT ...............................................................................................
E1/11
A2/4
3/4
A4/6
F1/32
F1/29
E2/4
E2/4
E2/4
A3/24, A4/18,
E1/16
A1/2
A2/10
E1/16
E1/5
F1/23
E1/7, E1/10
E1/17
E1/16
E1/11
H
hardware configuration ............................................................... 1/2
hatched background
A2/5, A2/19,
A2/35
HELP .......................................................................................... E1/16
help screen ................................................................................. 3/3
I
icon with a sub-menu ..................................................................
icons ...........................................................................................
IF .................................................................................................
image coding ..............................................................................
image resolution .........................................................................
IMDSK.DAT file ...........................................................................
inactive task ................................................................................
index for displaying messages ....................................................
initial alarm colors .......................................................................
initializing the application ............................................................
inserting a line in the table ..........................................................
A2/3
A2/4, A2/5
F1/16
A1/2
3/2, A1/2
B2/3
A4/22
A3/27, A3/28
E1/7
C1/3
A4/19, D1/2,
E1/2, F1/3
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/7
H
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
inserting a variable in the table ...................................................
install command ..........................................................................
INSTR .........................................................................................
instruction ...................................................................................
integer value ...............................................................................
interval timers .............................................................................
inverting a screen .......................................................................
inverting a screen .......................................................................
inverting a symbol .......................................................................
inverting a symbol .......................................................................
invisible grid ................................................................................
keyboard language .....................................................................
A4/8
1/5
F1/30
F1/16
F1/12
D1/2, D1/4
A2/26
A2/26
A2/25
A2/26
A2/11
3/2
L1 to L14 .....................................................................................
LAST ...........................................................................................
LE ...............................................................................................
LEN .............................................................................................
Library menu in animation editor ................................................
library function ............................................................................
licence agreement ......................................................................
line thickness ..............................................................................
list of alarms screen ....................................................................
list of configuration tables ...........................................................
list of cross-references ................................................................
list of files already saved .............................................................
list of files present in the cartridge ..............................................
list of possible choices : <Alt> <Q> .............................................
E1/17
E2/4
E1/11
F1/30
A3/4
F1/27
1/4
A2/33
E2/2
A4/5
A4/5
A2/8
B2/5
A4/11, D1/2,
E1/2
A2/16
A4/5
C2/12
A3/29, F1/11
F1/17, F1/32
1/4
F1/28
F1/28
F1/21
F1/11
F1/30
E1/11
F1/31
L
list of symbols .............................................................................
list of variables in the database ..................................................
local printing ................................................................................
local variable ...............................................................................
LOCK ..........................................................................................
locking the diskettes ...................................................................
LOG ............................................................................................
LOGE ..........................................................................................
logic operator on numerical operands ........................................
LONG ..........................................................................................
LOWER .......................................................................................
LT ................................................................................................
LTRIM .........................................................................................
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/8
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
M
masking alarms ...........................................................................
mathematical function .................................................................
MATHLOG ..................................................................................
memory size for the task .............................................................
MESSAGE ..................................................................................
message box ..............................................................................
message box variable .................................................................
meta-character ............................................................................
minimum cartridge size ...............................................................
minimum memory size required for the task ...............................
MMI OFB ....................................................................................
MOD ...........................................................................................
modifying the status of a task (active/inactive) ...........................
module number ...........................................................................
mouse - left button ......................................................................
mouse - right button ....................................................................
moving an animated object under GED ......................................
moving part of a screen ..............................................................
moving the cursor around the configuration tables .....................
E1/11
F1/28
A3/24, A4/18
A4/18, A4/22
A3/29
A3/26
A3/27
B1/8, B1/9
1/3
A4/18
A4/14
F1/19
A4/23
3/2
A2/3
A2/3
3/5
A2/14
A4/8, A4/11,
D1/2, E1/2,
F1/3
moving the menu ........................................................................ A2/6
N
name of file transferred ...............................................................
negative image on the screen .....................................................
NOT ............................................................................................
number of addressable objects ...................................................
number of animations per screen ...............................................
number of bits .............................................................................
number of characters displayed ..................................................
number of floating point numbers ...............................................
number of groups of alarms ........................................................
number of messages ..................................................................
number of times database accessed ..........................................
number of words .........................................................................
numeric output ............................................................................
numerical output variable ............................................................
B2/10
A2/37
F1/21
3/5
3/5
3/5
A3/16, A3/20
3/5
E1/7
3/5
A4/22
3/5
A3/17
A3/18
OFB ............................................................................................
OFF .............................................................................................
ON ..............................................................................................
on-line help .................................................................................
E1/13
A3/25, E1/11
A3/25, E1/11
H1/2
O
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/9
H
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
opening a file under ANT ............................................................
operation password ....................................................................
operator ......................................................................................
OR ..............................................................................................
order of execution of actions .......................................................
OS/2 session ..............................................................................
overlapping blocks ......................................................................
A3/5
A4/23, B1/4
F1/18
F1/21
A3/25
1/5
F1/37
paint ............................................................................................
paint color ...................................................................................
paint variable ..............................................................................
pasting an object with pre-recorded animation parameters ........
permission option ........................................................................
PGDN .........................................................................................
PGUP ..........................................................................................
physical address of the communication modules .......................
.PIC extension ............................................................................
PL7 .............................................................................................
PL7-MMI 37 software version .....................................................
PLC object address ....................................................................
position of the variable in the database ......................................
positive image on the screen ......................................................
POW ...........................................................................................
precision for floating point values ...............................................
predefined function
predefined variables ...................................................................
PRINT .........................................................................................
A3/8
A3/9
A3/9
A3/6
A4/18
E1/16
E1/16
3/3
A2/7
A3/29
C2/16
A3/31
A4/9
A2/37
F1/28
E1/7
F1/27, A2/35
H2/3
E1/16, F1/17,
F1/32
C2/8
C2/12
E1/17
A4/18
E1/11
F1/24
F1/15, F1/17
F1/7, F1/14,
F1/15
F1/5, F1/8
B1/3
1/3
A2/8
1/5
P
printing format .............................................................................
printing the documentation .........................................................
PRINTSEL ..................................................................................
priority level .................................................................................
priority of alarms .........................................................................
priority of operators .....................................................................
PROC .........................................................................................
procedure ....................................................................................
procedures file ............................................................................
process finished ..........................................................................
processor version .......................................................................
prohibited file names ...................................................................
prompt .........................................................................................
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/10
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
Q
quote ........................................................................................... F1/33
R
read time .....................................................................................
reading a local cartridge .............................................................
reading an animated symbol in the library ..................................
record number of the variable in the table ..................................
redefining a curved line ...............................................................
reference value for activating an alarm .......................................
relational operator .......................................................................
replacing a color with the background color ...............................
replacing a color with the foreground color .................................
replacing one color with another .................................................
report format ...............................................................................
report heading .............................................................................
reproducing a negative image ....................................................
reproducing a positive image ......................................................
retrieving a screen ......................................................................
retrieving a symbol ......................................................................
retrieving an application previously saved to diskette(s) ............
RETURN .....................................................................................
RND ............................................................................................
rotating an image ........................................................................
run option ....................................................................................
Run-time manager ......................................................................
RUNMGR ....................................................................................
running the RUNMGR Run-time manager ..................................
A3/31, A4/13
B2/4
A3/34
A4/10
A2/24
E1/11
F1/20
A2/20
A2/20
A2/21, A2/36
A4/6
A4/6
A2/17
A2/16
A2/7, A2/17
A2/16
C2/5
E1/16
F1/28
A2/25
A4/17
A4/17
A3/24, A4/18,
A4/21
S
saving a file under ANT ..............................................................
saving a screen ...........................................................................
saving a symbol ..........................................................................
saving an animated symbol in the library ....................................
saving the application to diskette(s) ............................................
saving the current image to a buffer memory .............................
scroll bar .....................................................................................
SDN ............................................................................................
searching for a string of characters ............................................
A3/5
A2/7, A2/16
A2/16
A3/34
C2/5
A2/38
H1/3
E1/16
A4/8, A4/11,
D1/3, E1/3,
F1/4
searching for an object ............................................................... A3/6
SELECT ...................................................................................... E2/4
selecting colors ........................................................................... A2/36
selecting files .............................................................................. B1/7
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/11
H
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
selecting tasks ............................................................................
selecting the .BAM file ................................................................
selecting the module ...................................................................
selection points ...........................................................................
semi-graphic ...............................................................................
SET .............................................................................................
shadow thickness .......................................................................
SHORT .......................................................................................
SIN ..............................................................................................
size of the transferred file ...........................................................
Software Workshop ....................................................................
software configuration .................................................................
software key ................................................................................
software package ........................................................................
SORT ..........................................................................................
SORTSEL ...................................................................................
source directory ..........................................................................
special effects (DRAG) ...............................................................
SQR ............................................................................................
starting the application ................................................................
static screens ..............................................................................
station documentation .................................................................
status zone .................................................................................
stopping the application ..............................................................
stopping the work in progress .....................................................
STRING ......................................................................................
SUB ............................................................................................
SUBSTR .....................................................................................
SUP ............................................................................................
symbol ........................................................................................
symbol constant ..........................................................................
symbol permanently visible .........................................................
symbol size .................................................................................
symbols on screen ......................................................................
system option ..............................................................................
B1/6
A3/28
3/2
A3/6, A3/7
C2/8
A3/24, A3/25
A2/12
F1/11
F1/28
B2/10
1/5
1/3
1/4
1/3
E1/16
E1/17
B1/8
A2/34
F1/29
C1/3
A2/3
C2/13
A2/4, A2/5
A4/22, C1/3
A2/38
F1/11
A3/24, A3/25
F1/31
E1/16
A3/31
F1/12
A2/18
A2/15
A2/16
A4/17
TAN .............................................................................................
target directory ............................................................................
task error .....................................................................................
task operating and error messages ............................................
task status ...................................................................................
TENFT ........................................................................................
Test menu in animation editor ....................................................
F1/29
B1/8
A4/22
A4/22
A4/22
A3/24, A4/18
A3/4
T
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/12
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
testing an animation ....................................................................
text editor ....................................................................................
text entry .....................................................................................
text entry variable .......................................................................
text output ...................................................................................
text output variable .....................................................................
text zone .....................................................................................
TGL .............................................................................................
THEN ..........................................................................................
TIME ...........................................................................................
TIME ...........................................................................................
time the cartridge was formatted ................................................
.TIT file ........................................................................................
title of the application ..................................................................
title page for dossier ...................................................................
TOP ............................................................................................
Transfer menu in main screen ....................................................
transfer status .............................................................................
transposing two colors ................................................................
TRIM ...........................................................................................
TSXCOM ....................................................................................
type and version of module .........................................................
type of cartridge ..........................................................................
type of coloration on bargraph ....................................................
type of display console ...............................................................
type of file ...................................................................................
type of line ..................................................................................
type of module cartridge .............................................................
type of printer ..............................................................................
type of transfer taking place ........................................................
type of variables ..........................................................................
A3/32
F1/5
A3/21
A3/22
A3/14
A3/15
H1/3
A3/25, E1/11
F1/16
E1/17
E2/3
B2/4
C2/10
C2/9
C2/9
E2/4
3/5
B2/10
A2/37
F1/31
A3/24, A4/18
C1/3
B2/4
A3/12
C1/3
A2/7
A2/33
C1/3
C2/8, C2/13
B2/10
A3/29, A3/31
underlining text ...........................................................................
UNDO command ........................................................................
UNLOCK .....................................................................................
“unpasting” an image from the background ................................
UPPER .......................................................................................
using $ and * generic characters ................................................
Utilities menu in main screen ......................................................
Utilities menu in Run-time manager ............................................
A2/13
A2/38
F1/17, F1/32
A2/18
F1/31
A3/34
3/4
A4/4
U
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/13
H
______________________________________________________
Index
___________________________________________________________________________
V
variable assigned as read ...........................................................
variable assigned as write ..........................................................
variable limits ..............................................................................
variables exchanged between module and processor ................
View menu in Run-time manager ...............................................
visible grid of variable size ..........................................................
visible grid over the whole screen ...............................................
A3/31
A3/31, A4/13
A3/22, A3/24
A4/12
A4/4
A2/10
A2/10
W
WEND ......................................................................................... F1/16
WHILE ........................................................................................ F1/16
X
X grid divisions ............................................................................ A2/10
XOR ............................................................................................ F1/22
Y grid divisions ............................................................................ A2/10
Z
zoom ........................................................................................... A2/9
H
_______________________________________________________________________________________
6/14
MMI37 PACK "packaged" range
Installation notice
ENGLISH
Products included in MMI37 PACK
2 versions are available :
1. TXT P PL7 M37 V52E : complete PACK kit for a station device,
2. TXT RP PL7 M37 V52E : station update kit from version V5 to V52,
The composition of each version is given in the following table :
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
Component reference
Description of the components
TXT P PL7 M37 V42 (1)
W9 ...
W9 ....
TE90 standard protection key
licence agreement
manual
TXT LF PL7 M37 V52
TXT LF FB M37 V52
UPDATE B
TXT DM PL7 M37 V52 E
4MMI-37 V52 software diskettes
MMI 37 V52 function block diskette
update diskette
DOP V52 software installation manual
TSX LF M37 ADJ V52
Monitor 37 V52 adjustment software diskette
TSX DM M37 ADJ V52 M
ADJUST software installation manual
(1) not included in version TXT RP PL7 M37 V52E
Description of the operations to be performed
For each kit, 2 operations must be performed :
install the software with the diskettes supplied.
prepare the software keys.
1
2
Note : for the update kit, the previous versions do not need to be removed, refer to the general rules
for compatibility between the various versions supplied at the end of the document.
1
Software installation
The software must be installed on an FTX terminal, IBM PC or compatible microcomputer with
OS/2 operating system version 1.3, 2.1 or WARP3.0.
The complete installation of MMI37 PACK is achieved by installing all the following software :
Software name
Software reference
PL7-MMI 37
PL7-MMI37
PL7-MMI37
ADJUST MMI37
TXT LF PL7 M37 V52
UPDATE B
TXT LF FB M37 V52
TXT LF M37 ADJ V52
Number of
diskettes
4
1
1
1
___________________________________________________________________________
8
ENGLISH
Installation procedure :
•
•
•
•
stop all the X-TEL software running on the station,
place the first diskette (1/4) of the PL7-MMI37 ( TXT LF PL7 M37 V52) software in drive A,
open an OS/2 session as a window or full screen,
at the OS/2 prompt [C:\] enter the command :
[C:\] A:<Enter>
then [A:\] INSTALL<Enter>
• follow the software instructions,
• enter the following command each time new software is to be installed :
[C:\] A:<Enter>
then [A:\] INSTALL <Enter>, (or press the <up arrow> key then <Enter> ), and follow the
instructions for each one.
2
Preparation of the software keys
Use the X-TEL "KEY MANAGER" function described in the X-TEL V52 software workshop manual
(TXT DM XTEL V52E) section C-9 or MINI X-TEL V52 software workshop manual (TXT DM BRJ
V52E) section C-2 to process the software keys.
The TXT P PL7 M37 V52E complete PACK kit :
This kit contains a TXT P PL7 M37 V52 protection key , moreover you must have the working key
for the station and its backup key . The protection key rights must be transferred to the working key
for the station by :
• inserting the working key and the backup key in slots A and B of the station or of the key support,
• restoring the rights (Restore function) of the station backup key to its working key,
Result : the working key becomes the original key again and the backup key becomes a blank
key,
• leaving the original key in the station,
• inserting the TXT P PL7 M37 V52 protection key, selecting the rights which it contains and
transferring them (Increment function) to the original key,
Result : the update kit key becomes blank and the original key contains the V52 rights.
• saving (Backup function) the original key to one of the blank keys,
Result : the original key becomes the working key for the station and the blank key becomes the
backup key,
• keep the backup key in a safe place.
All the software can now be started from this station.
The V5->V52 (TXT RP PL7 M37 V52E) update kit :
The execution rights of the V52 software are the same as those of the V5 software. There is nothing
to do : the working key for the station is already created.
___________________________________________________________________________
9
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
General compatibility rules
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
Compatibility of workshops in relation to the function and application levels :
• A V52 station provides programming and operation of V5 applications on TSXV5/PMXV5 type
stations with V5 functions.
The software workshop functions are level V52 but the PL7 applications remain at level V5 on
V5 stations.
PL7-3 applications on V5 stations remain at level V5 or can be changed by PL7-3 , if necessary,
to level V52.
• A V52 station provides programming and operation of V4 (or V3) applications on TSXV4/PMXV4
(TSXV3) type stations with V4 (or V3) functions.
The software workshop functions are level V52 but the PL7 applications remain at level V4 on
V4 stations and at level V3 for the V3 stations.
The V4 applications can be changed to level V5 by copying/pasting the PL7 function icons of the
V4 stations to the V5 stations. Some preparation is required before using the copying procedure
(the complete procedure is described in the X-TEL V52 software workshop manual (TXT DM
XTEL V52E).
• While an application remains at level V4 on a V4 station, it can still be processed by V4, V42, V5
and V52 workshops; in this case, the V52 workshops simply offer additional working comfort and
improve the productivity.
The procedures for application migration are developed for :
- all software in X-TEL and MINI X-TEL software workshops installation manuals (TXT L BASE
V5E and TXT L BJR V5E- part A - Section 3.5),
- each tool or function in the corresponding installation manual.
___________________________________________________________________________
10

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project